| Server IP : 85.214.239.14 / Your IP : 18.216.253.84 Web Server : Apache/2.4.62 (Debian) System : Linux h2886529.stratoserver.net 4.9.0 #1 SMP Tue Jan 9 19:45:01 MSK 2024 x86_64 User : www-data ( 33) PHP Version : 7.4.18 Disable Function : pcntl_alarm,pcntl_fork,pcntl_waitpid,pcntl_wait,pcntl_wifexited,pcntl_wifstopped,pcntl_wifsignaled,pcntl_wifcontinued,pcntl_wexitstatus,pcntl_wtermsig,pcntl_wstopsig,pcntl_signal,pcntl_signal_get_handler,pcntl_signal_dispatch,pcntl_get_last_error,pcntl_strerror,pcntl_sigprocmask,pcntl_sigwaitinfo,pcntl_sigtimedwait,pcntl_exec,pcntl_getpriority,pcntl_setpriority,pcntl_async_signals,pcntl_unshare, MySQL : OFF | cURL : OFF | WGET : ON | Perl : ON | Python : ON | Sudo : ON | Pkexec : OFF Directory : /proc/2/root/proc/3/root/proc/2/task/2/cwd/proc/2/cwd/usr/share/vim/vim90/doc/ |
Upload File : |
*builtin.txt* For Vim version 9.0. Last change: 2023 Feb 27
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
Builtin functions *builtin-functions*
Note: Expression evaluation can be disabled at compile time, the builtin
functions are not available then. See |+eval| and |no-eval-feature|.
For functions grouped by what they are used for see |function-list|.
1. Overview |builtin-function-list|
2. Details |builtin-function-details|
3. Feature list |feature-list|
4. Matching a pattern in a String |string-match|
==============================================================================
1. Overview *builtin-function-list*
Use CTRL-] on the function name to jump to the full explanation.
USAGE RESULT DESCRIPTION ~
abs({expr}) Float or Number absolute value of {expr}
acos({expr}) Float arc cosine of {expr}
add({object}, {item}) List/Blob append {item} to {object}
and({expr}, {expr}) Number bitwise AND
append({lnum}, {text}) Number append {text} below line {lnum}
appendbufline({expr}, {lnum}, {text})
Number append {text} below line {lnum}
in buffer {expr}
argc([{winid}]) Number number of files in the argument list
argidx() Number current index in the argument list
arglistid([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]]) Number argument list id
argv({nr} [, {winid}]) String {nr} entry of the argument list
argv([-1, {winid}]) List the argument list
asin({expr}) Float arc sine of {expr}
assert_beeps({cmd}) Number assert {cmd} causes a beep
assert_equal({exp}, {act} [, {msg}])
Number assert {exp} is equal to {act}
assert_equalfile({fname-one}, {fname-two} [, {msg}])
Number assert file contents are equal
assert_exception({error} [, {msg}])
Number assert {error} is in v:exception
assert_fails({cmd} [, {error} [, {msg} [, {lnum} [, {context}]]]])
Number assert {cmd} fails
assert_false({actual} [, {msg}])
Number assert {actual} is false
assert_inrange({lower}, {upper}, {actual} [, {msg}])
Number assert {actual} is inside the range
assert_match({pat}, {text} [, {msg}])
Number assert {pat} matches {text}
assert_nobeep({cmd}) Number assert {cmd} does not cause a beep
assert_notequal({exp}, {act} [, {msg}])
Number assert {exp} is not equal {act}
assert_notmatch({pat}, {text} [, {msg}])
Number assert {pat} not matches {text}
assert_report({msg}) Number report a test failure
assert_true({actual} [, {msg}]) Number assert {actual} is true
atan({expr}) Float arc tangent of {expr}
atan2({expr1}, {expr2}) Float arc tangent of {expr1} / {expr2}
autocmd_add({acmds}) Bool add a list of autocmds and groups
autocmd_delete({acmds}) Bool delete a list of autocmds and groups
autocmd_get([{opts}]) List return a list of autocmds
balloon_gettext() String current text in the balloon
balloon_show({expr}) none show {expr} inside the balloon
balloon_split({msg}) List split {msg} as used for a balloon
blob2list({blob}) List convert {blob} into a list of numbers
browse({save}, {title}, {initdir}, {default})
String put up a file requester
browsedir({title}, {initdir}) String put up a directory requester
bufadd({name}) Number add a buffer to the buffer list
bufexists({buf}) Number |TRUE| if buffer {buf} exists
buflisted({buf}) Number |TRUE| if buffer {buf} is listed
bufload({buf}) Number load buffer {buf} if not loaded yet
bufloaded({buf}) Number |TRUE| if buffer {buf} is loaded
bufname([{buf}]) String Name of the buffer {buf}
bufnr([{buf} [, {create}]]) Number Number of the buffer {buf}
bufwinid({buf}) Number window ID of buffer {buf}
bufwinnr({buf}) Number window number of buffer {buf}
byte2line({byte}) Number line number at byte count {byte}
byteidx({expr}, {nr}) Number byte index of {nr}'th char in {expr}
byteidxcomp({expr}, {nr}) Number byte index of {nr}'th char in {expr}
call({func}, {arglist} [, {dict}])
any call {func} with arguments {arglist}
ceil({expr}) Float round {expr} up
ch_canread({handle}) Number check if there is something to read
ch_close({handle}) none close {handle}
ch_close_in({handle}) none close in part of {handle}
ch_evalexpr({handle}, {expr} [, {options}])
any evaluate {expr} on JSON {handle}
ch_evalraw({handle}, {string} [, {options}])
any evaluate {string} on raw {handle}
ch_getbufnr({handle}, {what}) Number get buffer number for {handle}/{what}
ch_getjob({channel}) Job get the Job of {channel}
ch_info({handle}) String info about channel {handle}
ch_log({msg} [, {handle}]) none write {msg} in the channel log file
ch_logfile({fname} [, {mode}]) none start logging channel activity
ch_open({address} [, {options}])
Channel open a channel to {address}
ch_read({handle} [, {options}]) String read from {handle}
ch_readblob({handle} [, {options}])
Blob read Blob from {handle}
ch_readraw({handle} [, {options}])
String read raw from {handle}
ch_sendexpr({handle}, {expr} [, {options}])
any send {expr} over JSON {handle}
ch_sendraw({handle}, {expr} [, {options}])
any send {expr} over raw {handle}
ch_setoptions({handle}, {options})
none set options for {handle}
ch_status({handle} [, {options}])
String status of channel {handle}
changenr() Number current change number
char2nr({expr} [, {utf8}]) Number ASCII/UTF-8 value of first char in {expr}
charclass({string}) Number character class of {string}
charcol({expr} [, {winid}]) Number column number of cursor or mark
charidx({string}, {idx} [, {countcc}])
Number char index of byte {idx} in {string}
chdir({dir}) String change current working directory
cindent({lnum}) Number C indent for line {lnum}
clearmatches([{win}]) none clear all matches
col({expr} [, {winid}]) Number column byte index of cursor or mark
complete({startcol}, {matches}) none set Insert mode completion
complete_add({expr}) Number add completion match
complete_check() Number check for key typed during completion
complete_info([{what}]) Dict get current completion information
confirm({msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]])
Number number of choice picked by user
copy({expr}) any make a shallow copy of {expr}
cos({expr}) Float cosine of {expr}
cosh({expr}) Float hyperbolic cosine of {expr}
count({comp}, {expr} [, {ic} [, {start}]])
Number count how many {expr} are in {comp}
cscope_connection([{num}, {dbpath} [, {prepend}]])
Number checks existence of cscope connection
cursor({lnum}, {col} [, {off}])
Number move cursor to {lnum}, {col}, {off}
cursor({list}) Number move cursor to position in {list}
debugbreak({pid}) Number interrupt process being debugged
deepcopy({expr} [, {noref}]) any make a full copy of {expr}
delete({fname} [, {flags}]) Number delete the file or directory {fname}
deletebufline({buf}, {first} [, {last}])
Number delete lines from buffer {buf}
did_filetype() Number |TRUE| if FileType autocmd event used
diff_filler({lnum}) Number diff filler lines about {lnum}
diff_hlID({lnum}, {col}) Number diff highlighting at {lnum}/{col}
digraph_get({chars}) String get the |digraph| of {chars}
digraph_getlist([{listall}]) List get all |digraph|s
digraph_set({chars}, {digraph}) Boolean register |digraph|
digraph_setlist({digraphlist}) Boolean register multiple |digraph|s
echoraw({expr}) none output {expr} as-is
empty({expr}) Number |TRUE| if {expr} is empty
environ() Dict return environment variables
escape({string}, {chars}) String escape {chars} in {string} with '\'
eval({string}) any evaluate {string} into its value
eventhandler() Number |TRUE| if inside an event handler
executable({expr}) Number 1 if executable {expr} exists
execute({command}) String execute {command} and get the output
exepath({expr}) String full path of the command {expr}
exists({expr}) Number |TRUE| if {expr} exists
exists_compiled({expr}) Number |TRUE| if {expr} exists at compile time
exp({expr}) Float exponential of {expr}
expand({expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]])
any expand special keywords in {expr}
expandcmd({string} [, {options}])
String expand {string} like with `:edit`
extend({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}])
List/Dict insert items of {expr2} into {expr1}
extendnew({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}])
List/Dict like |extend()| but creates a new
List or Dictionary
feedkeys({string} [, {mode}]) Number add key sequence to typeahead buffer
filereadable({file}) Number |TRUE| if {file} is a readable file
filewritable({file}) Number |TRUE| if {file} is a writable file
filter({expr1}, {expr2}) List/Dict/Blob/String
remove items from {expr1} where
{expr2} is 0
finddir({name} [, {path} [, {count}]])
String find directory {name} in {path}
findfile({name} [, {path} [, {count}]])
String find file {name} in {path}
flatten({list} [, {maxdepth}]) List flatten {list} up to {maxdepth} levels
flattennew({list} [, {maxdepth}])
List flatten a copy of {list}
float2nr({expr}) Number convert Float {expr} to a Number
floor({expr}) Float round {expr} down
fmod({expr1}, {expr2}) Float remainder of {expr1} / {expr2}
fnameescape({fname}) String escape special characters in {fname}
fnamemodify({fname}, {mods}) String modify file name
foldclosed({lnum}) Number first line of fold at {lnum} if closed
foldclosedend({lnum}) Number last line of fold at {lnum} if closed
foldlevel({lnum}) Number fold level at {lnum}
foldtext() String line displayed for closed fold
foldtextresult({lnum}) String text for closed fold at {lnum}
foreground() Number bring the Vim window to the foreground
fullcommand({name} [, {vim9}]) String get full command from {name}
funcref({name} [, {arglist}] [, {dict}])
Funcref reference to function {name}
function({name} [, {arglist}] [, {dict}])
Funcref named reference to function {name}
garbagecollect([{atexit}]) none free memory, breaking cyclic references
get({list}, {idx} [, {def}]) any get item {idx} from {list} or {def}
get({dict}, {key} [, {def}]) any get item {key} from {dict} or {def}
get({func}, {what}) any get property of funcref/partial {func}
getbufinfo([{buf}]) List information about buffers
getbufline({buf}, {lnum} [, {end}])
List lines {lnum} to {end} of buffer {buf}
getbufoneline({buf}, {lnum}) String line {lnum} of buffer {buf}
getbufvar({buf}, {varname} [, {def}])
any variable {varname} in buffer {buf}
getcellwidths() List get character cell width overrides
getchangelist([{buf}]) List list of change list items
getchar([expr]) Number or String
get one character from the user
getcharmod() Number modifiers for the last typed character
getcharpos({expr}) List position of cursor, mark, etc.
getcharsearch() Dict last character search
getcharstr([expr]) String get one character from the user
getcmdcompltype() String return the type of the current
command-line completion
getcmdline() String return the current command-line
getcmdpos() Number return cursor position in command-line
getcmdscreenpos() Number return cursor screen position in
command-line
getcmdtype() String return current command-line type
getcmdwintype() String return current command-line window type
getcompletion({pat}, {type} [, {filtered}])
List list of cmdline completion matches
getcurpos([{winnr}]) List position of the cursor
getcursorcharpos([{winnr}]) List character position of the cursor
getcwd([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]]) String get the current working directory
getenv({name}) String return environment variable
getfontname([{name}]) String name of font being used
getfperm({fname}) String file permissions of file {fname}
getfsize({fname}) Number size in bytes of file {fname}
getftime({fname}) Number last modification time of file
getftype({fname}) String description of type of file {fname}
getimstatus() Number |TRUE| if the IME status is active
getjumplist([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]])
List list of jump list items
getline({lnum}) String line {lnum} of current buffer
getline({lnum}, {end}) List lines {lnum} to {end} of current buffer
getloclist({nr}) List list of location list items
getloclist({nr}, {what}) Dict get specific location list properties
getmarklist([{buf}]) List list of global/local marks
getmatches([{win}]) List list of current matches
getmousepos() Dict last known mouse position
getmouseshape() String current mouse shape name
getpid() Number process ID of Vim
getpos({expr}) List position of cursor, mark, etc.
getqflist() List list of quickfix items
getqflist({what}) Dict get specific quickfix list properties
getreg([{regname} [, 1 [, {list}]]])
String or List contents of a register
getreginfo([{regname}]) Dict information about a register
getregtype([{regname}]) String type of a register
getscriptinfo([{opts}]) List list of sourced scripts
gettabinfo([{expr}]) List list of tab pages
gettabvar({nr}, {varname} [, {def}])
any variable {varname} in tab {nr} or {def}
gettabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {name} [, {def}])
any {name} in {winnr} in tab page {tabnr}
gettagstack([{nr}]) Dict get the tag stack of window {nr}
gettext({text}) String lookup translation of {text}
getwininfo([{winid}]) List list of info about each window
getwinpos([{timeout}]) List X and Y coord in pixels of Vim window
getwinposx() Number X coord in pixels of the Vim window
getwinposy() Number Y coord in pixels of the Vim window
getwinvar({nr}, {varname} [, {def}])
any variable {varname} in window {nr}
glob({expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list} [, {alllinks}]]])
any expand file wildcards in {expr}
glob2regpat({expr}) String convert a glob pat into a search pat
globpath({path}, {expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list} [, {alllinks}]]])
String do glob({expr}) for all dirs in {path}
has({feature} [, {check}]) Number |TRUE| if feature {feature} supported
has_key({dict}, {key}) Number |TRUE| if {dict} has entry {key}
haslocaldir([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]])
Number |TRUE| if the window executed |:lcd|
or |:tcd|
hasmapto({what} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]])
Number |TRUE| if mapping to {what} exists
histadd({history}, {item}) Number add an item to a history
histdel({history} [, {item}]) Number remove an item from a history
histget({history} [, {index}]) String get the item {index} from a history
histnr({history}) Number highest index of a history
hlID({name}) Number syntax ID of highlight group {name}
hlexists({name}) Number |TRUE| if highlight group {name} exists
hlget([{name} [, {resolve}]]) List get highlight group attributes
hlset({list}) Number set highlight group attributes
hostname() String name of the machine Vim is running on
iconv({expr}, {from}, {to}) String convert encoding of {expr}
indent({lnum}) Number indent of line {lnum}
index({object}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]])
Number index in {object} where {expr} appears
indexof({object}, {expr} [, {opts}]])
Number index in {object} where {expr} is true
input({prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]])
String get input from the user
inputdialog({prompt} [, {text} [, {cancelreturn}]])
String like input() but in a GUI dialog
inputlist({textlist}) Number let the user pick from a choice list
inputrestore() Number restore typeahead
inputsave() Number save and clear typeahead
inputsecret({prompt} [, {text}]) String like input() but hiding the text
insert({object}, {item} [, {idx}]) List insert {item} in {object} [before {idx}]
interrupt() none interrupt script execution
invert({expr}) Number bitwise invert
isabsolutepath({path}) Number |TRUE| if {path} is an absolute path
isdirectory({directory}) Number |TRUE| if {directory} is a directory
isinf({expr}) Number determine if {expr} is infinity value
(positive or negative)
islocked({expr}) Number |TRUE| if {expr} is locked
isnan({expr}) Number |TRUE| if {expr} is NaN
items({dict}) List key-value pairs in {dict}
job_getchannel({job}) Channel get the channel handle for {job}
job_info([{job}]) Dict get information about {job}
job_setoptions({job}, {options}) none set options for {job}
job_start({command} [, {options}])
Job start a job
job_status({job}) String get the status of {job}
job_stop({job} [, {how}]) Number stop {job}
join({list} [, {sep}]) String join {list} items into one String
js_decode({string}) any decode JS style JSON
js_encode({expr}) String encode JS style JSON
json_decode({string}) any decode JSON
json_encode({expr}) String encode JSON
keys({dict}) List keys in {dict}
keytrans({string}) String translate internal keycodes to a form
that can be used by |:map|
len({expr}) Number the length of {expr}
libcall({lib}, {func}, {arg}) String call {func} in library {lib} with {arg}
libcallnr({lib}, {func}, {arg}) Number idem, but return a Number
line({expr} [, {winid}]) Number line nr of cursor, last line or mark
line2byte({lnum}) Number byte count of line {lnum}
lispindent({lnum}) Number Lisp indent for line {lnum}
list2blob({list}) Blob turn {list} of numbers into a Blob
list2str({list} [, {utf8}]) String turn {list} of numbers into a String
listener_add({callback} [, {buf}])
Number add a callback to listen to changes
listener_flush([{buf}]) none invoke listener callbacks
listener_remove({id}) none remove a listener callback
localtime() Number current time
log({expr}) Float natural logarithm (base e) of {expr}
log10({expr}) Float logarithm of Float {expr} to base 10
luaeval({expr} [, {expr}]) any evaluate |Lua| expression
map({expr1}, {expr2}) List/Dict/Blob/String
change each item in {expr1} to {expr2}
maparg({name} [, {mode} [, {abbr} [, {dict}]]])
String or Dict
rhs of mapping {name} in mode {mode}
mapcheck({name} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]])
String check for mappings matching {name}
maplist([{abbr}]) List list of all mappings, a dict for each
mapnew({expr1}, {expr2}) List/Dict/Blob/String
like |map()| but creates a new List or
Dictionary
mapset({mode}, {abbr}, {dict}) none restore mapping from |maparg()| result
match({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])
Number position where {pat} matches in {expr}
matchadd({group}, {pattern} [, {priority} [, {id} [, {dict}]]])
Number highlight {pattern} with {group}
matchaddpos({group}, {pos} [, {priority} [, {id} [, {dict}]]])
Number highlight positions with {group}
matcharg({nr}) List arguments of |:match|
matchdelete({id} [, {win}]) Number delete match identified by {id}
matchend({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])
Number position where {pat} ends in {expr}
matchfuzzy({list}, {str} [, {dict}])
List fuzzy match {str} in {list}
matchfuzzypos({list}, {str} [, {dict}])
List fuzzy match {str} in {list}
matchlist({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])
List match and submatches of {pat} in {expr}
matchstr({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])
String {count}'th match of {pat} in {expr}
matchstrpos({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])
List {count}'th match of {pat} in {expr}
max({expr}) Number maximum value of items in {expr}
menu_info({name} [, {mode}]) Dict get menu item information
min({expr}) Number minimum value of items in {expr}
mkdir({name} [, {flags} [, {prot}]])
Number create directory {name}
mode([expr]) String current editing mode
mzeval({expr}) any evaluate |MzScheme| expression
nextnonblank({lnum}) Number line nr of non-blank line >= {lnum}
nr2char({expr} [, {utf8}]) String single char with ASCII/UTF-8 value {expr}
or({expr}, {expr}) Number bitwise OR
pathshorten({expr} [, {len}]) String shorten directory names in a path
perleval({expr}) any evaluate |Perl| expression
popup_atcursor({what}, {options}) Number create popup window near the cursor
popup_beval({what}, {options}) Number create popup window for 'ballooneval'
popup_clear() none close all popup windows
popup_close({id} [, {result}]) none close popup window {id}
popup_create({what}, {options}) Number create a popup window
popup_dialog({what}, {options}) Number create a popup window used as a dialog
popup_filter_menu({id}, {key}) Number filter for a menu popup window
popup_filter_yesno({id}, {key}) Number filter for a dialog popup window
popup_findecho() Number get window ID of popup for `:echowin`
popup_findinfo() Number get window ID of info popup window
popup_findpreview() Number get window ID of preview popup window
popup_getoptions({id}) Dict get options of popup window {id}
popup_getpos({id}) Dict get position of popup window {id}
popup_hide({id}) none hide popup menu {id}
popup_list() List get a list of window IDs of all popups
popup_locate({row}, {col}) Number get window ID of popup at position
popup_menu({what}, {options}) Number create a popup window used as a menu
popup_move({id}, {options}) none set position of popup window {id}
popup_notification({what}, {options})
Number create a notification popup window
popup_setoptions({id}, {options})
none set options for popup window {id}
popup_settext({id}, {text}) none set the text of popup window {id}
popup_show({id}) none unhide popup window {id}
pow({x}, {y}) Float {x} to the power of {y}
prevnonblank({lnum}) Number line nr of non-blank line <= {lnum}
printf({fmt}, {expr1}...) String format text
prompt_getprompt({buf}) String get prompt text
prompt_setcallback({buf}, {expr}) none set prompt callback function
prompt_setinterrupt({buf}, {text}) none set prompt interrupt function
prompt_setprompt({buf}, {text}) none set prompt text
prop_add({lnum}, {col}, {props}) none add one text property
prop_add_list({props}, [[{lnum}, {col}, {end-lnum}, {end-col}], ...])
none add multiple text properties
prop_clear({lnum} [, {lnum-end} [, {props}]])
none remove all text properties
prop_find({props} [, {direction}])
Dict search for a text property
prop_list({lnum} [, {props}]) List text properties in {lnum}
prop_remove({props} [, {lnum} [, {lnum-end}]])
Number remove a text property
prop_type_add({name}, {props}) none define a new property type
prop_type_change({name}, {props})
none change an existing property type
prop_type_delete({name} [, {props}])
none delete a property type
prop_type_get({name} [, {props}])
Dict get property type values
prop_type_list([{props}]) List get list of property types
pum_getpos() Dict position and size of pum if visible
pumvisible() Number whether popup menu is visible
py3eval({expr}) any evaluate |python3| expression
pyeval({expr}) any evaluate |Python| expression
pyxeval({expr}) any evaluate |python_x| expression
rand([{expr}]) Number get pseudo-random number
range({expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]])
List items from {expr} to {max}
readblob({fname} [, {offset} [, {size}]])
Blob read a |Blob| from {fname}
readdir({dir} [, {expr} [, {dict}]])
List file names in {dir} selected by {expr}
readdirex({dir} [, {expr} [, {dict}]])
List file info in {dir} selected by {expr}
readfile({fname} [, {type} [, {max}]])
List get list of lines from file {fname}
reduce({object}, {func} [, {initial}])
any reduce {object} using {func}
reg_executing() String get the executing register name
reg_recording() String get the recording register name
reltime([{start} [, {end}]]) List get time value
reltimefloat({time}) Float turn the time value into a Float
reltimestr({time}) String turn time value into a String
remote_expr({server}, {string} [, {idvar} [, {timeout}]])
String send expression
remote_foreground({server}) Number bring Vim server to the foreground
remote_peek({serverid} [, {retvar}])
Number check for reply string
remote_read({serverid} [, {timeout}])
String read reply string
remote_send({server}, {string} [, {idvar}])
String send key sequence
remote_startserver({name}) none become server {name}
remove({list}, {idx} [, {end}]) any/List
remove items {idx}-{end} from {list}
remove({blob}, {idx} [, {end}]) Number/Blob
remove bytes {idx}-{end} from {blob}
remove({dict}, {key}) any remove entry {key} from {dict}
rename({from}, {to}) Number rename (move) file from {from} to {to}
repeat({expr}, {count}) List/Blob/String
repeat {expr} {count} times
resolve({filename}) String get filename a shortcut points to
reverse({list}) List reverse {list} in-place
round({expr}) Float round off {expr}
rubyeval({expr}) any evaluate |Ruby| expression
screenattr({row}, {col}) Number attribute at screen position
screenchar({row}, {col}) Number character at screen position
screenchars({row}, {col}) List List of characters at screen position
screencol() Number current cursor column
screenpos({winid}, {lnum}, {col}) Dict screen row and col of a text character
screenrow() Number current cursor row
screenstring({row}, {col}) String characters at screen position
search({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout} [, {skip}]]]])
Number search for {pattern}
searchcount([{options}]) Dict get or update search stats
searchdecl({name} [, {global} [, {thisblock}]])
Number search for variable declaration
searchpair({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} [...]]])
Number search for other end of start/end pair
searchpairpos({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} [...]]])
List search for other end of start/end pair
searchpos({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout} [, {skip}]]]])
List search for {pattern}
server2client({clientid}, {string})
Number send reply string
serverlist() String get a list of available servers
setbufline({expr}, {lnum}, {text})
Number set line {lnum} to {text} in buffer
{expr}
setbufvar({buf}, {varname}, {val})
none set {varname} in buffer {buf} to {val}
setcellwidths({list}) none set character cell width overrides
setcharpos({expr}, {list}) Number set the {expr} position to {list}
setcharsearch({dict}) Dict set character search from {dict}
setcmdline({str} [, {pos}]) Number set command-line
setcmdpos({pos}) Number set cursor position in command-line
setcursorcharpos({list}) Number move cursor to position in {list}
setenv({name}, {val}) none set environment variable
setfperm({fname}, {mode}) Number set {fname} file permissions to {mode}
setline({lnum}, {line}) Number set line {lnum} to {line}
setloclist({nr}, {list} [, {action}])
Number modify location list using {list}
setloclist({nr}, {list}, {action}, {what})
Number modify specific location list props
setmatches({list} [, {win}]) Number restore a list of matches
setpos({expr}, {list}) Number set the {expr} position to {list}
setqflist({list} [, {action}]) Number modify quickfix list using {list}
setqflist({list}, {action}, {what})
Number modify specific quickfix list props
setreg({n}, {v} [, {opt}]) Number set register to value and type
settabvar({nr}, {varname}, {val}) none set {varname} in tab page {nr} to {val}
settabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}, {val})
none set {varname} in window {winnr} in tab
page {tabnr} to {val}
settagstack({nr}, {dict} [, {action}])
Number modify tag stack using {dict}
setwinvar({nr}, {varname}, {val}) none set {varname} in window {nr} to {val}
sha256({string}) String SHA256 checksum of {string}
shellescape({string} [, {special}])
String escape {string} for use as shell
command argument
shiftwidth([{col}]) Number effective value of 'shiftwidth'
sign_define({name} [, {dict}]) Number define or update a sign
sign_define({list}) List define or update a list of signs
sign_getdefined([{name}]) List get a list of defined signs
sign_getplaced([{buf} [, {dict}]])
List get a list of placed signs
sign_jump({id}, {group}, {buf})
Number jump to a sign
sign_place({id}, {group}, {name}, {buf} [, {dict}])
Number place a sign
sign_placelist({list}) List place a list of signs
sign_undefine([{name}]) Number undefine a sign
sign_undefine({list}) List undefine a list of signs
sign_unplace({group} [, {dict}])
Number unplace a sign
sign_unplacelist({list}) List unplace a list of signs
simplify({filename}) String simplify filename as much as possible
sin({expr}) Float sine of {expr}
sinh({expr}) Float hyperbolic sine of {expr}
slice({expr}, {start} [, {end}]) String, List or Blob
slice of a String, List or Blob
sort({list} [, {how} [, {dict}]])
List sort {list}, compare with {how}
sound_clear() none stop playing all sounds
sound_playevent({name} [, {callback}])
Number play an event sound
sound_playfile({path} [, {callback}])
Number play sound file {path}
sound_stop({id}) none stop playing sound {id}
soundfold({word}) String sound-fold {word}
spellbadword() String badly spelled word at cursor
spellsuggest({word} [, {max} [, {capital}]])
List spelling suggestions
split({expr} [, {pat} [, {keepempty}]])
List make |List| from {pat} separated {expr}
sqrt({expr}) Float square root of {expr}
srand([{expr}]) List get seed for |rand()|
state([{what}]) String current state of Vim
str2float({expr} [, {quoted}]) Float convert String to Float
str2list({expr} [, {utf8}]) List convert each character of {expr} to
ASCII/UTF-8 value
str2nr({expr} [, {base} [, {quoted}]])
Number convert String to Number
strcharlen({expr}) Number character length of the String {expr}
strcharpart({str}, {start} [, {len} [, {skipcc}]])
String {len} characters of {str} at
character {start}
strchars({expr} [, {skipcc}]) Number character count of the String {expr}
strdisplaywidth({expr} [, {col}]) Number display length of the String {expr}
strftime({format} [, {time}]) String format time with a specified format
strgetchar({str}, {index}) Number get char {index} from {str}
stridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}])
Number index of {needle} in {haystack}
string({expr}) String String representation of {expr} value
strlen({expr}) Number length of the String {expr}
strpart({str}, {start} [, {len} [, {chars}]])
String {len} bytes/chars of {str} at
byte {start}
strptime({format}, {timestring})
Number Convert {timestring} to unix timestamp
strridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}])
Number last index of {needle} in {haystack}
strtrans({expr}) String translate string to make it printable
strwidth({expr}) Number display cell length of the String {expr}
submatch({nr} [, {list}]) String or List
specific match in ":s" or substitute()
substitute({expr}, {pat}, {sub}, {flags})
String all {pat} in {expr} replaced with {sub}
swapfilelist() List swap files found in 'directory'
swapinfo({fname}) Dict information about swap file {fname}
swapname({buf}) String swap file of buffer {buf}
synID({lnum}, {col}, {trans}) Number syntax ID at {lnum} and {col}
synIDattr({synID}, {what} [, {mode}])
String attribute {what} of syntax ID {synID}
synIDtrans({synID}) Number translated syntax ID of {synID}
synconcealed({lnum}, {col}) List info about concealing
synstack({lnum}, {col}) List stack of syntax IDs at {lnum} and {col}
system({expr} [, {input}]) String output of shell command/filter {expr}
systemlist({expr} [, {input}]) List output of shell command/filter {expr}
tabpagebuflist([{arg}]) List list of buffer numbers in tab page
tabpagenr([{arg}]) Number number of current or last tab page
tabpagewinnr({tabarg} [, {arg}]) Number number of current window in tab page
tagfiles() List tags files used
taglist({expr} [, {filename}]) List list of tags matching {expr}
tan({expr}) Float tangent of {expr}
tanh({expr}) Float hyperbolic tangent of {expr}
tempname() String name for a temporary file
term_dumpdiff({filename}, {filename} [, {options}])
Number display difference between two dumps
term_dumpload({filename} [, {options}])
Number displaying a screen dump
term_dumpwrite({buf}, {filename} [, {options}])
none dump terminal window contents
term_getaltscreen({buf}) Number get the alternate screen flag
term_getansicolors({buf}) List get ANSI palette in GUI color mode
term_getattr({attr}, {what}) Number get the value of attribute {what}
term_getcursor({buf}) List get the cursor position of a terminal
term_getjob({buf}) Job get the job associated with a terminal
term_getline({buf}, {row}) String get a line of text from a terminal
term_getscrolled({buf}) Number get the scroll count of a terminal
term_getsize({buf}) List get the size of a terminal
term_getstatus({buf}) String get the status of a terminal
term_gettitle({buf}) String get the title of a terminal
term_gettty({buf}, [{input}]) String get the tty name of a terminal
term_list() List get the list of terminal buffers
term_scrape({buf}, {row}) List get row of a terminal screen
term_sendkeys({buf}, {keys}) none send keystrokes to a terminal
term_setansicolors({buf}, {colors})
none set ANSI palette in GUI color mode
term_setapi({buf}, {expr}) none set |terminal-api| function name prefix
term_setkill({buf}, {how}) none set signal to stop job in terminal
term_setrestore({buf}, {command}) none set command to restore terminal
term_setsize({buf}, {rows}, {cols})
none set the size of a terminal
term_start({cmd} [, {options}]) Number open a terminal window and run a job
term_wait({buf} [, {time}]) Number wait for screen to be updated
terminalprops() Dict properties of the terminal
test_alloc_fail({id}, {countdown}, {repeat})
none make memory allocation fail
test_autochdir() none enable 'autochdir' during startup
test_feedinput({string}) none add key sequence to input buffer
test_garbagecollect_now() none free memory right now for testing
test_garbagecollect_soon() none free memory soon for testing
test_getvalue({string}) any get value of an internal variable
test_gui_event({event}, {args}) bool generate a GUI event for testing
test_ignore_error({expr}) none ignore a specific error
test_mswin_event({event}, {args})
bool generate MS-Windows event for testing
test_null_blob() Blob null value for testing
test_null_channel() Channel null value for testing
test_null_dict() Dict null value for testing
test_null_function() Funcref null value for testing
test_null_job() Job null value for testing
test_null_list() List null value for testing
test_null_partial() Funcref null value for testing
test_null_string() String null value for testing
test_option_not_set({name}) none reset flag indicating option was set
test_override({expr}, {val}) none test with Vim internal overrides
test_refcount({expr}) Number get the reference count of {expr}
test_setmouse({row}, {col}) none set the mouse position for testing
test_settime({expr}) none set current time for testing
test_srand_seed([seed]) none set seed for testing srand()
test_unknown() any unknown value for testing
test_void() any void value for testing
timer_info([{id}]) List information about timers
timer_pause({id}, {pause}) none pause or unpause a timer
timer_start({time}, {callback} [, {options}])
Number create a timer
timer_stop({timer}) none stop a timer
timer_stopall() none stop all timers
tolower({expr}) String the String {expr} switched to lowercase
toupper({expr}) String the String {expr} switched to uppercase
tr({src}, {fromstr}, {tostr}) String translate chars of {src} in {fromstr}
to chars in {tostr}
trim({text} [, {mask} [, {dir}]])
String trim characters in {mask} from {text}
trunc({expr}) Float truncate Float {expr}
type({expr}) Number type of value {expr}
typename({expr}) String representation of the type of {expr}
undofile({name}) String undo file name for {name}
undotree() List undo file tree
uniq({list} [, {func} [, {dict}]])
List remove adjacent duplicates from a list
values({dict}) List values in {dict}
virtcol({expr} [, {list}]) Number or List
screen column of cursor or mark
virtcol2col({winid}, {lnum}, {col})
Number byte index of a character on screen
visualmode([expr]) String last visual mode used
wildmenumode() Number whether 'wildmenu' mode is active
win_execute({id}, {command} [, {silent}])
String execute {command} in window {id}
win_findbuf({bufnr}) List find windows containing {bufnr}
win_getid([{win} [, {tab}]]) Number get window ID for {win} in {tab}
win_gettype([{nr}]) String type of window {nr}
win_gotoid({expr}) Number go to window with ID {expr}
win_id2tabwin({expr}) List get tab and window nr from window ID
win_id2win({expr}) Number get window nr from window ID
win_move_separator({nr}) Number move window vertical separator
win_move_statusline({nr}) Number move window status line
win_screenpos({nr}) List get screen position of window {nr}
win_splitmove({nr}, {target} [, {options}])
Number move window {nr} to split of {target}
winbufnr({nr}) Number buffer number of window {nr}
wincol() Number window column of the cursor
windowsversion() String MS-Windows OS version
winheight({nr}) Number height of window {nr}
winlayout([{tabnr}]) List layout of windows in tab {tabnr}
winline() Number window line of the cursor
winnr([{expr}]) Number number of current window
winrestcmd() String returns command to restore window sizes
winrestview({dict}) none restore view of current window
winsaveview() Dict save view of current window
winwidth({nr}) Number width of window {nr}
wordcount() Dict get byte/char/word statistics
writefile({object}, {fname} [, {flags}])
Number write |Blob| or |List| of lines to file
xor({expr}, {expr}) Number bitwise XOR
==============================================================================
2. Details *builtin-function-details*
Not all functions are here, some have been moved to a help file covering the
specific functionality.
abs({expr}) *abs()*
Return the absolute value of {expr}. When {expr} evaluates to
a |Float| abs() returns a |Float|. When {expr} can be
converted to a |Number| abs() returns a |Number|. Otherwise
abs() gives an error message and returns -1.
Examples: >
echo abs(1.456)
< 1.456 >
echo abs(-5.456)
< 5.456 >
echo abs(-4)
< 4
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Compute()->abs()
acos({expr}) *acos()*
Return the arc cosine of {expr} measured in radians, as a
|Float| in the range of [0, pi].
{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range
[-1, 1]. Otherwise acos() returns "nan".
Examples: >
:echo acos(0)
< 1.570796 >
:echo acos(-0.5)
< 2.094395
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Compute()->acos()
add({object}, {expr}) *add()*
Append the item {expr} to |List| or |Blob| {object}. Returns
the resulting |List| or |Blob|. Examples: >
:let alist = add([1, 2, 3], item)
:call add(mylist, "woodstock")
< Note that when {expr} is a |List| it is appended as a single
item. Use |extend()| to concatenate |Lists|.
When {object} is a |Blob| then {expr} must be a number.
Use |insert()| to add an item at another position.
Returns 1 if {object} is not a |List| or a |Blob|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
mylist->add(val1)->add(val2)
and({expr}, {expr}) *and()*
Bitwise AND on the two arguments. The arguments are converted
to a number. A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error.
Also see `or()` and `xor()`.
Example: >
:let flag = and(bits, 0x80)
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
:let flag = bits->and(0x80)
append({lnum}, {text}) *append()*
When {text} is a |List|: Append each item of the |List| as a
text line below line {lnum} in the current buffer.
Otherwise append {text} as one text line below line {lnum} in
the current buffer.
Any type of item is accepted and converted to a String.
{lnum} can be zero to insert a line before the first one.
{lnum} is used like with |getline()|.
Returns 1 for failure ({lnum} out of range or out of memory),
0 for success. When {text} is an empty list zero is returned,
no matter the value of {lnum}.
In |Vim9| script an invalid argument or negative number
results in an error. Example: >
:let failed = append(line('$'), "# THE END")
:let failed = append(0, ["Chapter 1", "the beginning"])
< Can also be used as a |method| after a List, the base is
passed as the second argument: >
mylist->append(lnum)
appendbufline({buf}, {lnum}, {text}) *appendbufline()*
Like |append()| but append the text in buffer {buf}.
This function works only for loaded buffers. First call
|bufload()| if needed.
For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()|.
{lnum} is the line number to append below. Note that using
|line()| would use the current buffer, not the one appending
to. Use "$" to append at the end of the buffer. Other string
values are not supported.
On success 0 is returned, on failure 1 is returned.
In |Vim9| script an error is given for an invalid {lnum}.
If {buf} is not a valid buffer or {lnum} is not valid, an
error message is given. Example: >
:let failed = appendbufline(13, 0, "# THE START")
< However, when {text} is an empty list then no error is given
for an invalid {lnum}, since {lnum} isn't actually used.
Can also be used as a |method| after a List, the base is
passed as the second argument: >
mylist->appendbufline(buf, lnum)
argc([{winid}]) *argc()*
The result is the number of files in the argument list. See
|arglist|.
If {winid} is not supplied, the argument list of the current
window is used.
If {winid} is -1, the global argument list is used.
Otherwise {winid} specifies the window of which the argument
list is used: either the window number or the window ID.
Returns -1 if the {winid} argument is invalid.
*argidx()*
argidx() The result is the current index in the argument list. 0 is
the first file. argc() - 1 is the last one. See |arglist|.
*arglistid()*
arglistid([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]])
Return the argument list ID. This is a number which
identifies the argument list being used. Zero is used for the
global argument list. See |arglist|.
Returns -1 if the arguments are invalid.
Without arguments use the current window.
With {winnr} only use this window in the current tab page.
With {winnr} and {tabnr} use the window in the specified tab
page.
{winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
*argv()*
argv([{nr} [, {winid}]])
The result is the {nr}th file in the argument list. See
|arglist|. "argv(0)" is the first one. Example: >
:let i = 0
:while i < argc()
: let f = escape(fnameescape(argv(i)), '.')
: exe 'amenu Arg.' .. f .. ' :e ' .. f .. '<CR>'
: let i = i + 1
:endwhile
< Without the {nr} argument, or when {nr} is -1, a |List| with
the whole |arglist| is returned.
The {winid} argument specifies the window ID, see |argc()|.
For the Vim command line arguments see |v:argv|.
Returns an empty string if {nr}th argument is not present in
the argument list. Returns an empty List if the {winid}
argument is invalid.
asin({expr}) *asin()*
Return the arc sine of {expr} measured in radians, as a |Float|
in the range of [-pi/2, pi/2].
{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range
[-1, 1].
Returns "nan" if {expr} is outside the range [-1, 1]. Returns
0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|.
Examples: >
:echo asin(0.8)
< 0.927295 >
:echo asin(-0.5)
< -0.523599
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Compute()->asin()
assert_ functions are documented here: |assert-functions-details|
atan({expr}) *atan()*
Return the principal value of the arc tangent of {expr}, in
the range [-pi/2, +pi/2] radians, as a |Float|.
{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|.
Examples: >
:echo atan(100)
< 1.560797 >
:echo atan(-4.01)
< -1.326405
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Compute()->atan()
atan2({expr1}, {expr2}) *atan2()*
Return the arc tangent of {expr1} / {expr2}, measured in
radians, as a |Float| in the range [-pi, pi].
{expr1} and {expr2} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
Returns 0.0 if {expr1} or {expr2} is not a |Float| or a
|Number|.
Examples: >
:echo atan2(-1, 1)
< -0.785398 >
:echo atan2(1, -1)
< 2.356194
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Compute()->atan2(1)
autocmd_add({acmds}) *autocmd_add()*
Adds a List of autocmds and autocmd groups.
The {acmds} argument is a List where each item is a Dict with
the following optional items:
bufnr buffer number to add a buffer-local autocmd.
If this item is specified, then the "pattern"
item is ignored.
cmd Ex command to execute for this autocmd event
event autocmd event name. Refer to |autocmd-events|.
This can be either a String with a single
event name or a List of event names.
group autocmd group name. Refer to |autocmd-groups|.
If this group doesn't exist then it is
created. If not specified or empty, then the
default group is used.
nested boolean flag, set to v:true to add a nested
autocmd. Refer to |autocmd-nested|.
once boolean flag, set to v:true to add an autocmd
which executes only once. Refer to
|autocmd-once|.
pattern autocmd pattern string. Refer to
|autocmd-patterns|. If "bufnr" item is
present, then this item is ignored. This can
be a String with a single pattern or a List of
patterns.
replace boolean flag, set to v:true to remove all the
commands associated with the specified autocmd
event and group and add the {cmd}. This is
useful to avoid adding the same command
multiple times for an autocmd event in a group.
Returns v:true on success and v:false on failure.
Examples: >
" Create a buffer-local autocmd for buffer 5
let acmd = {}
let acmd.group = 'MyGroup'
let acmd.event = 'BufEnter'
let acmd.bufnr = 5
let acmd.cmd = 'call BufEnterFunc()'
call autocmd_add([acmd])
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetAutocmdList()->autocmd_add()
<
autocmd_delete({acmds}) *autocmd_delete()*
Deletes a List of autocmds and autocmd groups.
The {acmds} argument is a List where each item is a Dict with
the following optional items:
bufnr buffer number to delete a buffer-local autocmd.
If this item is specified, then the "pattern"
item is ignored.
cmd Ex command for this autocmd event
event autocmd event name. Refer to |autocmd-events|.
If '*' then all the autocmd events in this
group are deleted.
group autocmd group name. Refer to |autocmd-groups|.
If not specified or empty, then the default
group is used.
nested set to v:true for a nested autocmd.
Refer to |autocmd-nested|.
once set to v:true for an autocmd which executes
only once. Refer to |autocmd-once|.
pattern autocmd pattern string. Refer to
|autocmd-patterns|. If "bufnr" item is
present, then this item is ignored.
If only {group} is specified in a {acmds} entry and {event},
{pattern} and {cmd} are not specified, then that autocmd group
is deleted.
Returns |v:true| on success and |v:false| on failure.
Examples: >
" :autocmd! BufLeave *.vim
let acmd = #{event: 'BufLeave', pattern: '*.vim'}
call autocmd_delete([acmd]})
" :autocmd! MyGroup1 BufLeave
let acmd = #{group: 'MyGroup1', event: 'BufLeave'}
call autocmd_delete([acmd])
" :autocmd! MyGroup2 BufEnter *.c
let acmd = #{group: 'MyGroup2', event: 'BufEnter',
\ pattern: '*.c'}
" :autocmd! MyGroup2 * *.c
let acmd = #{group: 'MyGroup2', event: '*',
\ pattern: '*.c'}
call autocmd_delete([acmd])
" :autocmd! MyGroup3
let acmd = #{group: 'MyGroup3'}
call autocmd_delete([acmd])
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetAutocmdList()->autocmd_delete()
autocmd_get([{opts}]) *autocmd_get()*
Returns a |List| of autocmds. If {opts} is not supplied, then
returns the autocmds for all the events in all the groups.
The optional {opts} Dict argument supports the following
items:
group Autocmd group name. If specified, returns only
the autocmds defined in this group. If the
specified group doesn't exist, results in an
error message. If set to an empty string,
then the default autocmd group is used.
event Autocmd event name. If specified, returns only
the autocmds defined for this event. If set
to "*", then returns autocmds for all the
events. If the specified event doesn't exist,
results in an error message.
pattern Autocmd pattern. If specified, returns only
the autocmds defined for this pattern.
A combination of the above three times can be supplied in
{opts}.
Each Dict in the returned List contains the following items:
bufnr For buffer-local autocmds, buffer number where
the autocmd is defined.
cmd Command executed for this autocmd.
event Autocmd event name.
group Autocmd group name.
nested Boolean flag, set to v:true for a nested
autocmd. See |autocmd-nested|.
once Boolean flag, set to v:true, if the autocmd
will be executed only once. See |autocmd-once|.
pattern Autocmd pattern. For a buffer-local
autocmd, this will be of the form "<buffer=n>".
If there are multiple commands for an autocmd event in a
group, then separate items are returned for each command.
Returns an empty List if an autocmd with the specified group
or event or pattern is not found.
Examples: >
" :autocmd MyGroup
echo autocmd_get(#{group: 'Mygroup'})
" :autocmd G BufUnload
echo autocmd_get(#{group: 'G', event: 'BufUnload'})
" :autocmd G * *.ts
let acmd = #{group: 'G', event: '*', pattern: '*.ts'}
echo autocmd_get(acmd)
" :autocmd Syntax
echo autocmd_get(#{event: 'Syntax'})
" :autocmd G BufEnter *.ts
let acmd = #{group: 'G', event: 'BufEnter',
\ pattern: '*.ts'}
echo autocmd_get(acmd)
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Getopts()->autocmd_get()
<
balloon_gettext() *balloon_gettext()*
Return the current text in the balloon. Only for the string,
not used for the List. Returns an empty string if balloon
is not present.
balloon_show({expr}) *balloon_show()*
Show {expr} inside the balloon. For the GUI {expr} is used as
a string. For a terminal {expr} can be a list, which contains
the lines of the balloon. If {expr} is not a list it will be
split with |balloon_split()|.
If {expr} is an empty string any existing balloon is removed.
Example: >
func GetBalloonContent()
" ... initiate getting the content
return ''
endfunc
set balloonexpr=GetBalloonContent()
func BalloonCallback(result)
call balloon_show(a:result)
endfunc
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetText()->balloon_show()
<
The intended use is that fetching the content of the balloon
is initiated from 'balloonexpr'. It will invoke an
asynchronous method, in which a callback invokes
balloon_show(). The 'balloonexpr' itself can return an
empty string or a placeholder, e.g. "loading...".
When showing a balloon is not possible then nothing happens,
no error message is given.
{only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval| or
|+balloon_eval_term| feature}
balloon_split({msg}) *balloon_split()*
Split String {msg} into lines to be displayed in a balloon.
The splits are made for the current window size and optimize
to show debugger output.
Returns a |List| with the split lines. Returns an empty List
on error.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetText()->balloon_split()->balloon_show()
< {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval_term|
feature}
blob2list({blob}) *blob2list()*
Return a List containing the number value of each byte in Blob
{blob}. Examples: >
blob2list(0z0102.0304) returns [1, 2, 3, 4]
blob2list(0z) returns []
< Returns an empty List on error. |list2blob()| does the
opposite.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetBlob()->blob2list()
<
*browse()*
browse({save}, {title}, {initdir}, {default})
Put up a file requester. This only works when "has("browse")"
returns |TRUE| (only in some GUI versions).
The input fields are:
{save} when |TRUE|, select file to write
{title} title for the requester
{initdir} directory to start browsing in
{default} default file name
An empty string is returned when the "Cancel" button is hit,
something went wrong, or browsing is not possible.
*browsedir()*
browsedir({title}, {initdir})
Put up a directory requester. This only works when
"has("browse")" returns |TRUE| (only in some GUI versions).
On systems where a directory browser is not supported a file
browser is used. In that case: select a file in the directory
to be used.
The input fields are:
{title} title for the requester
{initdir} directory to start browsing in
When the "Cancel" button is hit, something went wrong, or
browsing is not possible, an empty string is returned.
bufadd({name}) *bufadd()*
Add a buffer to the buffer list with name {name} (must be a
String).
If a buffer for file {name} already exists, return that buffer
number. Otherwise return the buffer number of the newly
created buffer. When {name} is an empty string then a new
buffer is always created.
The buffer will not have 'buflisted' set and not be loaded
yet. To add some text to the buffer use this: >
let bufnr = bufadd('someName')
call bufload(bufnr)
call setbufline(bufnr, 1, ['some', 'text'])
< Returns 0 on error.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
let bufnr = 'somename'->bufadd()
bufexists({buf}) *bufexists()*
The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| if a buffer called
{buf} exists.
If the {buf} argument is a number, buffer numbers are used.
Number zero is the alternate buffer for the current window.
If the {buf} argument is a string it must match a buffer name
exactly. The name can be:
- Relative to the current directory.
- A full path.
- The name of a buffer with 'buftype' set to "nofile".
- A URL name.
Unlisted buffers will be found.
Note that help files are listed by their short name in the
output of |:buffers|, but bufexists() requires using their
long name to be able to find them.
bufexists() may report a buffer exists, but to use the name
with a |:buffer| command you may need to use |expand()|. Esp
for MS-Windows 8.3 names in the form "c:\DOCUME~1"
Use "bufexists(0)" to test for the existence of an alternate
file name.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
let exists = 'somename'->bufexists()
<
Obsolete name: buffer_exists(). *buffer_exists()*
buflisted({buf}) *buflisted()*
The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| if a buffer called
{buf} exists and is listed (has the 'buflisted' option set).
The {buf} argument is used like with |bufexists()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
let listed = 'somename'->buflisted()
bufload({buf}) *bufload()*
Ensure the buffer {buf} is loaded. When the buffer name
refers to an existing file then the file is read. Otherwise
the buffer will be empty. If the buffer was already loaded
then there is no change. If the buffer is not related to a
file the no file is read (e.g., when 'buftype' is "nofile").
If there is an existing swap file for the file of the buffer,
there will be no dialog, the buffer will be loaded anyway.
The {buf} argument is used like with |bufexists()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
eval 'somename'->bufload()
bufloaded({buf}) *bufloaded()*
The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| if a buffer called
{buf} exists and is loaded (shown in a window or hidden).
The {buf} argument is used like with |bufexists()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
let loaded = 'somename'->bufloaded()
bufname([{buf}]) *bufname()*
The result is the name of a buffer. Mostly as it is displayed
by the `:ls` command, but not using special names such as
"[No Name]".
If {buf} is omitted the current buffer is used.
If {buf} is a Number, that buffer number's name is given.
Number zero is the alternate buffer for the current window.
If {buf} is a String, it is used as a |file-pattern| to match
with the buffer names. This is always done like 'magic' is
set and 'cpoptions' is empty. When there is more than one
match an empty string is returned.
"" or "%" can be used for the current buffer, "#" for the
alternate buffer.
A full match is preferred, otherwise a match at the start, end
or middle of the buffer name is accepted. If you only want a
full match then put "^" at the start and "$" at the end of the
pattern.
Listed buffers are found first. If there is a single match
with a listed buffer, that one is returned. Next unlisted
buffers are searched for.
If the {buf} is a String, but you want to use it as a buffer
number, force it to be a Number by adding zero to it: >
:echo bufname("3" + 0)
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
echo bufnr->bufname()
< If the buffer doesn't exist, or doesn't have a name, an empty
string is returned. >
bufname("#") alternate buffer name
bufname(3) name of buffer 3
bufname("%") name of current buffer
bufname("file2") name of buffer where "file2" matches.
< *buffer_name()*
Obsolete name: buffer_name().
*bufnr()*
bufnr([{buf} [, {create}]])
The result is the number of a buffer, as it is displayed by
the `:ls` command. For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()|
above.
If the buffer doesn't exist, -1 is returned. Or, if the
{create} argument is present and TRUE, a new, unlisted,
buffer is created and its number is returned. Example: >
let newbuf = bufnr('Scratch001', 1)
< Using an empty name uses the current buffer. To create a new
buffer with an empty name use |bufadd()|.
bufnr("$") is the last buffer: >
:let last_buffer = bufnr("$")
< The result is a Number, which is the highest buffer number
of existing buffers. Note that not all buffers with a smaller
number necessarily exist, because ":bwipeout" may have removed
them. Use bufexists() to test for the existence of a buffer.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
echo bufref->bufnr()
<
Obsolete name: buffer_number(). *buffer_number()*
*last_buffer_nr()*
Obsolete name for bufnr("$"): last_buffer_nr().
bufwinid({buf}) *bufwinid()*
The result is a Number, which is the |window-ID| of the first
window associated with buffer {buf}. For the use of {buf},
see |bufname()| above. If buffer {buf} doesn't exist or
there is no such window, -1 is returned. Example: >
echo "A window containing buffer 1 is " .. (bufwinid(1))
<
Only deals with the current tab page. See |win_findbuf()| for
finding more.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
FindBuffer()->bufwinid()
bufwinnr({buf}) *bufwinnr()*
Like |bufwinid()| but return the window number instead of the
|window-ID|.
If buffer {buf} doesn't exist or there is no such window, -1
is returned. Example: >
echo "A window containing buffer 1 is " .. (bufwinnr(1))
< The number can be used with |CTRL-W_w| and ":wincmd w"
|:wincmd|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
FindBuffer()->bufwinnr()
byte2line({byte}) *byte2line()*
Return the line number that contains the character at byte
count {byte} in the current buffer. This includes the
end-of-line character, depending on the 'fileformat' option
for the current buffer. The first character has byte count
one.
Also see |line2byte()|, |go| and |:goto|.
Returns -1 if the {byte} value is invalid.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetOffset()->byte2line()
< {not available when compiled without the |+byte_offset|
feature}
byteidx({expr}, {nr}) *byteidx()*
Return byte index of the {nr}'th character in the String
{expr}. Use zero for the first character, it then returns
zero.
If there are no multibyte characters the returned value is
equal to {nr}.
Composing characters are not counted separately, their byte
length is added to the preceding base character. See
|byteidxcomp()| below for counting composing characters
separately.
Example : >
echo matchstr(str, ".", byteidx(str, 3))
< will display the fourth character. Another way to do the
same: >
let s = strpart(str, byteidx(str, 3))
echo strpart(s, 0, byteidx(s, 1))
< Also see |strgetchar()| and |strcharpart()|.
If there are less than {nr} characters -1 is returned.
If there are exactly {nr} characters the length of the string
in bytes is returned.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetName()->byteidx(idx)
byteidxcomp({expr}, {nr}) *byteidxcomp()*
Like byteidx(), except that a composing character is counted
as a separate character. Example: >
let s = 'e' .. nr2char(0x301)
echo byteidx(s, 1)
echo byteidxcomp(s, 1)
echo byteidxcomp(s, 2)
< The first and third echo result in 3 ('e' plus composing
character is 3 bytes), the second echo results in 1 ('e' is
one byte).
Only works differently from byteidx() when 'encoding' is set
to a Unicode encoding.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetName()->byteidxcomp(idx)
call({func}, {arglist} [, {dict}]) *call()* *E699*
Call function {func} with the items in |List| {arglist} as
arguments.
{func} can either be a |Funcref| or the name of a function.
a:firstline and a:lastline are set to the cursor line.
Returns the return value of the called function.
{dict} is for functions with the "dict" attribute. It will be
used to set the local variable "self". |Dictionary-function|
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetFunc()->call([arg, arg], dict)
ceil({expr}) *ceil()*
Return the smallest integral value greater than or equal to
{expr} as a |Float| (round up).
{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
Examples: >
echo ceil(1.456)
< 2.0 >
echo ceil(-5.456)
< -5.0 >
echo ceil(4.0)
< 4.0
Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Compute()->ceil()
ch_ functions are documented here: |channel-functions-details|
changenr() *changenr()*
Return the number of the most recent change. This is the same
number as what is displayed with |:undolist| and can be used
with the |:undo| command.
When a change was made it is the number of that change. After
redo it is the number of the redone change. After undo it is
one less than the number of the undone change.
Returns 0 if the undo list is empty.
char2nr({string} [, {utf8}]) *char2nr()*
Return Number value of the first char in {string}.
Examples: >
char2nr(" ") returns 32
char2nr("ABC") returns 65
< When {utf8} is omitted or zero, the current 'encoding' is used.
Example for "utf-8": >
char2nr("á") returns 225
char2nr("á"[0]) returns 195
< When {utf8} is TRUE, always treat as UTF-8 characters.
A combining character is a separate character.
|nr2char()| does the opposite.
To turn a string into a list of character numbers: >
let str = "ABC"
let list = map(split(str, '\zs'), {_, val -> char2nr(val)})
< Result: [65, 66, 67]
Returns 0 if {string} is not a |String|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetChar()->char2nr()
charclass({string}) *charclass()*
Return the character class of the first character in {string}.
The character class is one of:
0 blank
1 punctuation
2 word character
3 emoji
other specific Unicode class
The class is used in patterns and word motions.
Returns 0 if {string} is not a |String|.
charcol({expr} [, {winid}]) *charcol()*
Same as |col()| but returns the character index of the column
position given with {expr} instead of the byte position.
Example:
With the cursor on '세' in line 5 with text "여보세요": >
charcol('.') returns 3
col('.') returns 7
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetPos()->col()
<
*charidx()*
charidx({string}, {idx} [, {countcc}])
Return the character index of the byte at {idx} in {string}.
The index of the first character is zero.
If there are no multibyte characters the returned value is
equal to {idx}.
When {countcc} is omitted or |FALSE|, then composing characters
are not counted separately, their byte length is
added to the preceding base character.
When {countcc} is |TRUE|, then composing characters are
counted as separate characters.
Returns -1 if the arguments are invalid or if {idx} is greater
than the index of the last byte in {string}. An error is
given if the first argument is not a string, the second
argument is not a number or when the third argument is present
and is not zero or one.
See |byteidx()| and |byteidxcomp()| for getting the byte index
from the character index.
Examples: >
echo charidx('áb́ć', 3) returns 1
echo charidx('áb́ć', 6, 1) returns 4
echo charidx('áb́ć', 16) returns -1
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetName()->charidx(idx)
chdir({dir}) *chdir()*
Change the current working directory to {dir}. The scope of
the directory change depends on the directory of the current
window:
- If the current window has a window-local directory
(|:lcd|), then changes the window local directory.
- Otherwise, if the current tabpage has a local
directory (|:tcd|) then changes the tabpage local
directory.
- Otherwise, changes the global directory.
{dir} must be a String.
If successful, returns the previous working directory. Pass
this to another chdir() to restore the directory.
On failure, returns an empty string.
Example: >
let save_dir = chdir(newdir)
if save_dir != ""
" ... do some work
call chdir(save_dir)
endif
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetDir()->chdir()
<
cindent({lnum}) *cindent()*
Get the amount of indent for line {lnum} according the C
indenting rules, as with 'cindent'.
The indent is counted in spaces, the value of 'tabstop' is
relevant. {lnum} is used just like in |getline()|.
When {lnum} is invalid -1 is returned.
See |C-indenting|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetLnum()->cindent()
clearmatches([{win}]) *clearmatches()*
Clears all matches previously defined for the current window
by |matchadd()| and the |:match| commands.
If {win} is specified, use the window with this number or
window ID instead of the current window.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWin()->clearmatches()
<
col({expr} [, {winid}) *col()*
The result is a Number, which is the byte index of the column
position given with {expr}. The accepted positions are:
. the cursor position
$ the end of the cursor line (the result is the
number of bytes in the cursor line plus one)
'x position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is
returned)
v In Visual mode: the start of the Visual area (the
cursor is the end). When not in Visual mode
returns the cursor position. Differs from |'<| in
that it's updated right away.
Additionally {expr} can be [lnum, col]: a |List| with the line
and column number. Most useful when the column is "$", to get
the last column of a specific line. When "lnum" or "col" is
out of range then col() returns zero.
With the optional {winid} argument the values are obtained for
that window instead of the current window.
To get the line number use |line()|. To get both use
|getpos()|.
For the screen column position use |virtcol()|. For the
character position use |charcol()|.
Note that only marks in the current file can be used.
Examples: >
col(".") column of cursor
col("$") length of cursor line plus one
col("'t") column of mark t
col("'" .. markname) column of mark markname
< The first column is 1. Returns 0 if {expr} is invalid or when
the window with ID {winid} is not found.
For an uppercase mark the column may actually be in another
buffer.
For the cursor position, when 'virtualedit' is active, the
column is one higher if the cursor is after the end of the
line. Also, when using a <Cmd> mapping the cursor isn't
moved, this can be used to obtain the column in Insert mode: >
:imap <F2> <Cmd>echowin col(".")<CR>
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetPos()->col()
<
complete({startcol}, {matches}) *complete()* *E785*
Set the matches for Insert mode completion.
Can only be used in Insert mode. You need to use a mapping
with CTRL-R = (see |i_CTRL-R|). It does not work after CTRL-O
or with an expression mapping.
{startcol} is the byte offset in the line where the completed
text start. The text up to the cursor is the original text
that will be replaced by the matches. Use col('.') for an
empty string. "col('.') - 1" will replace one character by a
match.
{matches} must be a |List|. Each |List| item is one match.
See |complete-items| for the kind of items that are possible.
"longest" in 'completeopt' is ignored.
Note that the after calling this function you need to avoid
inserting anything that would cause completion to stop.
The match can be selected with CTRL-N and CTRL-P as usual with
Insert mode completion. The popup menu will appear if
specified, see |ins-completion-menu|.
Example: >
inoremap <F5> <C-R>=ListMonths()<CR>
func! ListMonths()
call complete(col('.'), ['January', 'February', 'March',
\ 'April', 'May', 'June', 'July', 'August', 'September',
\ 'October', 'November', 'December'])
return ''
endfunc
< This isn't very useful, but it shows how it works. Note that
an empty string is returned to avoid a zero being inserted.
Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
second argument: >
GetMatches()->complete(col('.'))
complete_add({expr}) *complete_add()*
Add {expr} to the list of matches. Only to be used by the
function specified with the 'completefunc' option.
Returns 0 for failure (empty string or out of memory),
1 when the match was added, 2 when the match was already in
the list.
See |complete-functions| for an explanation of {expr}. It is
the same as one item in the list that 'omnifunc' would return.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetMoreMatches()->complete_add()
complete_check() *complete_check()*
Check for a key typed while looking for completion matches.
This is to be used when looking for matches takes some time.
Returns |TRUE| when searching for matches is to be aborted,
zero otherwise.
Only to be used by the function specified with the
'completefunc' option.
complete_info([{what}]) *complete_info()*
Returns a |Dictionary| with information about Insert mode
completion. See |ins-completion|.
The items are:
mode Current completion mode name string.
See |complete_info_mode| for the values.
pum_visible |TRUE| if popup menu is visible.
See |pumvisible()|.
items List of completion matches. Each item is a
dictionary containing the entries "word",
"abbr", "menu", "kind", "info" and "user_data".
See |complete-items|.
selected Selected item index. First index is zero.
Index is -1 if no item is selected (showing
typed text only, or the last completion after
no item is selected when using the <Up> or
<Down> keys)
inserted Inserted string. [NOT IMPLEMENTED YET]
*complete_info_mode*
mode values are:
"" Not in completion mode
"keyword" Keyword completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-N|
"ctrl_x" Just pressed CTRL-X |i_CTRL-X|
"scroll" Scrolling with |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-E| or
|i_CTRL-X_CTRL-Y|
"whole_line" Whole lines |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L|
"files" File names |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-F|
"tags" Tags |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-]|
"path_defines" Definition completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-D|
"path_patterns" Include completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-I|
"dictionary" Dictionary |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|
"thesaurus" Thesaurus |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|
"cmdline" Vim Command line |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-V|
"function" User defined completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-U|
"omni" Omni completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-O|
"spell" Spelling suggestions |i_CTRL-X_s|
"eval" |complete()| completion
"unknown" Other internal modes
If the optional {what} list argument is supplied, then only
the items listed in {what} are returned. Unsupported items in
{what} are silently ignored.
To get the position and size of the popup menu, see
|pum_getpos()|. It's also available in |v:event| during the
|CompleteChanged| event.
Returns an empty |Dictionary| on error.
Examples: >
" Get all items
call complete_info()
" Get only 'mode'
call complete_info(['mode'])
" Get only 'mode' and 'pum_visible'
call complete_info(['mode', 'pum_visible'])
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetItems()->complete_info()
<
*confirm()*
confirm({msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]])
confirm() offers the user a dialog, from which a choice can be
made. It returns the number of the choice. For the first
choice this is 1.
Note: confirm() is only supported when compiled with dialog
support, see |+dialog_con| and |+dialog_gui|.
{msg} is displayed in a |dialog| with {choices} as the
alternatives. When {choices} is missing or empty, "&OK" is
used (and translated).
{msg} is a String, use '\n' to include a newline. Only on
some systems the string is wrapped when it doesn't fit.
{choices} is a String, with the individual choices separated
by '\n', e.g. >
confirm("Save changes?", "&Yes\n&No\n&Cancel")
< The letter after the '&' is the shortcut key for that choice.
Thus you can type 'c' to select "Cancel". The shortcut does
not need to be the first letter: >
confirm("file has been modified", "&Save\nSave &All")
< For the console, the first letter of each choice is used as
the default shortcut key. Case is ignored.
The optional {default} argument is the number of the choice
that is made if the user hits <CR>. Use 1 to make the first
choice the default one. Use 0 to not set a default. If
{default} is omitted, 1 is used.
The optional {type} String argument gives the type of dialog.
This is only used for the icon of the GTK, Mac, Motif and
Win32 GUI. It can be one of these values: "Error",
"Question", "Info", "Warning" or "Generic". Only the first
character is relevant. When {type} is omitted, "Generic" is
used.
If the user aborts the dialog by pressing <Esc>, CTRL-C,
or another valid interrupt key, confirm() returns 0.
An example: >
let choice = confirm("What do you want?",
\ "&Apples\n&Oranges\n&Bananas", 2)
if choice == 0
echo "make up your mind!"
elseif choice == 3
echo "tasteful"
else
echo "I prefer bananas myself."
endif
< In a GUI dialog, buttons are used. The layout of the buttons
depends on the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'. If it is included,
the buttons are always put vertically. Otherwise, confirm()
tries to put the buttons in one horizontal line. If they
don't fit, a vertical layout is used anyway. For some systems
the horizontal layout is always used.
Can also be used as a |method|in: >
BuildMessage()->confirm("&Yes\n&No")
<
*copy()*
copy({expr}) Make a copy of {expr}. For Numbers and Strings this isn't
different from using {expr} directly.
When {expr} is a |List| a shallow copy is created. This means
that the original |List| can be changed without changing the
copy, and vice versa. But the items are identical, thus
changing an item changes the contents of both |Lists|.
A |Dictionary| is copied in a similar way as a |List|.
Also see |deepcopy()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
mylist->copy()
cos({expr}) *cos()*
Return the cosine of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float|.
{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|.
Examples: >
:echo cos(100)
< 0.862319 >
:echo cos(-4.01)
< -0.646043
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Compute()->cos()
cosh({expr}) *cosh()*
Return the hyperbolic cosine of {expr} as a |Float| in the range
[1, inf].
{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|.
Examples: >
:echo cosh(0.5)
< 1.127626 >
:echo cosh(-0.5)
< -1.127626
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Compute()->cosh()
count({comp}, {expr} [, {ic} [, {start}]]) *count()*
Return the number of times an item with value {expr} appears
in |String|, |List| or |Dictionary| {comp}.
If {start} is given then start with the item with this index.
{start} can only be used with a |List|.
When {ic} is given and it's |TRUE| then case is ignored.
When {comp} is a string then the number of not overlapping
occurrences of {expr} is returned. Zero is returned when
{expr} is an empty string.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
mylist->count(val)
<
*cscope_connection()*
cscope_connection([{num} , {dbpath} [, {prepend}]])
Checks for the existence of a |cscope| connection. If no
parameters are specified, then the function returns:
0, if cscope was not available (not compiled in), or
if there are no cscope connections;
1, if there is at least one cscope connection.
If parameters are specified, then the value of {num}
determines how existence of a cscope connection is checked:
{num} Description of existence check
----- ------------------------------
0 Same as no parameters (e.g., "cscope_connection()").
1 Ignore {prepend}, and use partial string matches for
{dbpath}.
2 Ignore {prepend}, and use exact string matches for
{dbpath}.
3 Use {prepend}, use partial string matches for both
{dbpath} and {prepend}.
4 Use {prepend}, use exact string matches for both
{dbpath} and {prepend}.
Note: All string comparisons are case sensitive!
Examples. Suppose we had the following (from ":cs show"): >
# pid database name prepend path
0 27664 cscope.out /usr/local
<
Invocation Return Val ~
---------- ---------- >
cscope_connection() 1
cscope_connection(1, "out") 1
cscope_connection(2, "out") 0
cscope_connection(3, "out") 0
cscope_connection(3, "out", "local") 1
cscope_connection(4, "out") 0
cscope_connection(4, "out", "local") 0
cscope_connection(4, "cscope.out", "/usr/local") 1
<
cursor({lnum}, {col} [, {off}]) *cursor()*
cursor({list})
Positions the cursor at the column (byte count) {col} in the
line {lnum}. The first column is one.
When there is one argument {list} this is used as a |List|
with two, three or four item:
[{lnum}, {col}]
[{lnum}, {col}, {off}]
[{lnum}, {col}, {off}, {curswant}]
This is like the return value of |getpos()| or |getcurpos()|,
but without the first item.
To position the cursor using the character count, use
|setcursorcharpos()|.
Does not change the jumplist.
{lnum} is used like with |getline()|, except that if {lnum} is
zero, the cursor will stay in the current line.
If {lnum} is greater than the number of lines in the buffer,
the cursor will be positioned at the last line in the buffer.
If {col} is greater than the number of bytes in the line,
the cursor will be positioned at the last character in the
line.
If {col} is zero, the cursor will stay in the current column.
If {curswant} is given it is used to set the preferred column
for vertical movement. Otherwise {col} is used.
When 'virtualedit' is used {off} specifies the offset in
screen columns from the start of the character. E.g., a
position within a <Tab> or after the last character.
Returns 0 when the position could be set, -1 otherwise.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetCursorPos()->cursor()
debugbreak({pid}) *debugbreak()*
Specifically used to interrupt a program being debugged. It
will cause process {pid} to get a SIGTRAP. Behavior for other
processes is undefined. See |terminal-debugger|.
{only available on MS-Windows}
Returns |TRUE| if successfully interrupted the program.
Otherwise returns |FALSE|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetPid()->debugbreak()
deepcopy({expr} [, {noref}]) *deepcopy()* *E698*
Make a copy of {expr}. For Numbers and Strings this isn't
different from using {expr} directly.
When {expr} is a |List| a full copy is created. This means
that the original |List| can be changed without changing the
copy, and vice versa. When an item is a |List| or
|Dictionary|, a copy for it is made, recursively. Thus
changing an item in the copy does not change the contents of
the original |List|.
A |Dictionary| is copied in a similar way as a |List|.
When {noref} is omitted or zero a contained |List| or
|Dictionary| is only copied once. All references point to
this single copy. With {noref} set to 1 every occurrence of a
|List| or |Dictionary| results in a new copy. This also means
that a cyclic reference causes deepcopy() to fail.
*E724*
Nesting is possible up to 100 levels. When there is an item
that refers back to a higher level making a deep copy with
{noref} set to 1 will fail.
Also see |copy()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetObject()->deepcopy()
delete({fname} [, {flags}]) *delete()*
Without {flags} or with {flags} empty: Deletes the file by the
name {fname}.
This also works when {fname} is a symbolic link. The symbolic
link itself is deleted, not what it points to.
When {flags} is "d": Deletes the directory by the name
{fname}. This fails when directory {fname} is not empty.
When {flags} is "rf": Deletes the directory by the name
{fname} and everything in it, recursively. BE CAREFUL!
Note: on MS-Windows it is not possible to delete a directory
that is being used.
The result is a Number, which is 0/false if the delete
operation was successful and -1/true when the deletion failed
or partly failed.
Use |remove()| to delete an item from a |List|.
To delete a line from the buffer use |:delete| or
|deletebufline()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetName()->delete()
deletebufline({buf}, {first} [, {last}]) *deletebufline()*
Delete lines {first} to {last} (inclusive) from buffer {buf}.
If {last} is omitted then delete line {first} only.
On success 0 is returned, on failure 1 is returned.
This function works only for loaded buffers. First call
|bufload()| if needed.
For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above.
{first} and {last} are used like with |getline()|. Note that
when using |line()| this refers to the current buffer. Use "$"
to refer to the last line in buffer {buf}.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetBuffer()->deletebufline(1)
<
*did_filetype()*
did_filetype() Returns |TRUE| when autocommands are being executed and the
FileType event has been triggered at least once. Can be used
to avoid triggering the FileType event again in the scripts
that detect the file type. |FileType|
Returns |FALSE| when `:setf FALLBACK` was used.
When editing another file, the counter is reset, thus this
really checks if the FileType event has been triggered for the
current buffer. This allows an autocommand that starts
editing another buffer to set 'filetype' and load a syntax
file.
diff_filler({lnum}) *diff_filler()*
Returns the number of filler lines above line {lnum}.
These are the lines that were inserted at this point in
another diff'ed window. These filler lines are shown in the
display but don't exist in the buffer.
{lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current
line, "'m" mark m, etc.
Returns 0 if the current window is not in diff mode.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetLnum()->diff_filler()
diff_hlID({lnum}, {col}) *diff_hlID()*
Returns the highlight ID for diff mode at line {lnum} column
{col} (byte index). When the current line does not have a
diff change zero is returned.
{lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current
line, "'m" mark m, etc.
{col} is 1 for the leftmost column, {lnum} is 1 for the first
line.
The highlight ID can be used with |synIDattr()| to obtain
syntax information about the highlighting.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetLnum()->diff_hlID(col)
<
digraph_get({chars}) *digraph_get()* *E1214*
Return the digraph of {chars}. This should be a string with
exactly two characters. If {chars} are not just two
characters, or the digraph of {chars} does not exist, an error
is given and an empty string is returned.
The character will be converted from Unicode to 'encoding'
when needed. This does require the conversion to be
available, it might fail.
Also see |digraph_getlist()|.
Examples: >
" Get a built-in digraph
:echo digraph_get('00') " Returns '∞'
" Get a user-defined digraph
:call digraph_set('aa', 'あ')
:echo digraph_get('aa') " Returns 'あ'
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetChars()->digraph_get()
<
This function works only when compiled with the |+digraphs|
feature. If this feature is disabled, this function will
display an error message.
digraph_getlist([{listall}]) *digraph_getlist()*
Return a list of digraphs. If the {listall} argument is given
and it is TRUE, return all digraphs, including the default
digraphs. Otherwise, return only user-defined digraphs.
The characters will be converted from Unicode to 'encoding'
when needed. This does require the conservation to be
available, it might fail.
Also see |digraph_get()|.
Examples: >
" Get user-defined digraphs
:echo digraph_getlist()
" Get all the digraphs, including default digraphs
:echo digraph_getlist(1)
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetNumber()->digraph_getlist()
<
This function works only when compiled with the |+digraphs|
feature. If this feature is disabled, this function will
display an error message.
digraph_set({chars}, {digraph}) *digraph_set()*
Add digraph {chars} to the list. {chars} must be a string
with two characters. {digraph} is a string with one UTF-8
encoded character. *E1215*
Be careful, composing characters are NOT ignored. This
function is similar to |:digraphs| command, but useful to add
digraphs start with a white space.
The function result is v:true if |digraph| is registered. If
this fails an error message is given and v:false is returned.
If you want to define multiple digraphs at once, you can use
|digraph_setlist()|.
Example: >
call digraph_set(' ', 'あ')
<
Can be used as a |method|: >
GetString()->digraph_set('あ')
<
This function works only when compiled with the |+digraphs|
feature. If this feature is disabled, this function will
display an error message.
digraph_setlist({digraphlist}) *digraph_setlist()*
Similar to |digraph_set()| but this function can add multiple
digraphs at once. {digraphlist} is a list composed of lists,
where each list contains two strings with {chars} and
{digraph} as in |digraph_set()|. *E1216*
Example: >
call digraph_setlist([['aa', 'あ'], ['ii', 'い']])
<
It is similar to the following: >
for [chars, digraph] in [['aa', 'あ'], ['ii', 'い']]
call digraph_set(chars, digraph)
endfor
< Except that the function returns after the first error,
following digraphs will not be added.
Can be used as a |method|: >
GetList()->digraph_setlist()
<
This function works only when compiled with the |+digraphs|
feature. If this feature is disabled, this function will
display an error message.
echoraw({string}) *echoraw()*
Output {string} as-is, including unprintable characters.
This can be used to output a terminal code. For example, to
disable modifyOtherKeys: >
call echoraw(&t_TE)
< and to enable it again: >
call echoraw(&t_TI)
< Use with care, you can mess up the terminal this way.
empty({expr}) *empty()*
Return the Number 1 if {expr} is empty, zero otherwise.
- A |List| or |Dictionary| is empty when it does not have any
items.
- A |String| is empty when its length is zero.
- A |Number| and |Float| are empty when their value is zero.
- |v:false|, |v:none| and |v:null| are empty, |v:true| is not.
- A |Job| is empty when it failed to start.
- A |Channel| is empty when it is closed.
- A |Blob| is empty when its length is zero.
For a long |List| this is much faster than comparing the
length with zero.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
mylist->empty()
environ() *environ()*
Return all of environment variables as dictionary. You can
check if an environment variable exists like this: >
:echo has_key(environ(), 'HOME')
< Note that the variable name may be CamelCase; to ignore case
use this: >
:echo index(keys(environ()), 'HOME', 0, 1) != -1
escape({string}, {chars}) *escape()*
Escape the characters in {chars} that occur in {string} with a
backslash. Example: >
:echo escape('c:\program files\vim', ' \')
< results in: >
c:\\program\ files\\vim
< Also see |shellescape()| and |fnameescape()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetText()->escape(' \')
<
*eval()*
eval({string}) Evaluate {string} and return the result. Especially useful to
turn the result of |string()| back into the original value.
This works for Numbers, Floats, Strings, Blobs and composites
of them. Also works for |Funcref|s that refer to existing
functions.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
argv->join()->eval()
eventhandler() *eventhandler()*
Returns 1 when inside an event handler. That is that Vim got
interrupted while waiting for the user to type a character,
e.g., when dropping a file on Vim. This means interactive
commands cannot be used. Otherwise zero is returned.
executable({expr}) *executable()*
This function checks if an executable with the name {expr}
exists. {expr} must be the name of the program without any
arguments.
executable() uses the value of $PATH and/or the normal
searchpath for programs. *PATHEXT*
On MS-Windows the ".exe", ".bat", etc. can optionally be
included. Then the extensions in $PATHEXT are tried. Thus if
"foo.exe" does not exist, "foo.exe.bat" can be found. If
$PATHEXT is not set then ".com;.exe;.bat;.cmd" is used. A dot
by itself can be used in $PATHEXT to try using the name
without an extension. When 'shell' looks like a Unix shell,
then the name is also tried without adding an extension.
On MS-Windows it only checks if the file exists and is not a
directory, not if it's really executable.
On MS-Windows an executable in the same directory as Vim is
normally found. Since this directory is added to $PATH it
should also work to execute it |win32-PATH|. This can be
disabled by setting the $NoDefaultCurrentDirectoryInExePath
environment variable. *NoDefaultCurrentDirectoryInExePath*
The result is a Number:
1 exists
0 does not exist
-1 not implemented on this system
|exepath()| can be used to get the full path of an executable.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetCommand()->executable()
execute({command} [, {silent}]) *execute()*
Execute an Ex command or commands and return the output as a
string.
{command} can be a string or a List. In case of a List the
lines are executed one by one.
This is equivalent to: >
redir => var
{command}
redir END
<
The optional {silent} argument can have these values:
"" no `:silent` used
"silent" `:silent` used
"silent!" `:silent!` used
The default is "silent". Note that with "silent!", unlike
`:redir`, error messages are dropped. When using an external
command the screen may be messed up, use `system()` instead.
*E930*
It is not possible to use `:redir` anywhere in {command}.
To get a list of lines use |split()| on the result: >
execute('args')->split("\n")
< To execute a command in another window than the current one
use `win_execute()`.
When used recursively the output of the recursive call is not
included in the output of the higher level call.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetCommand()->execute()
exepath({expr}) *exepath()*
If {expr} is an executable and is either an absolute path, a
relative path or found in $PATH, return the full path.
Note that the current directory is used when {expr} starts
with "./", which may be a problem for Vim: >
echo exepath(v:progpath)
< If {expr} cannot be found in $PATH or is not executable then
an empty string is returned.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetCommand()->exepath()
<
*exists()*
exists({expr}) The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| if {expr} is defined,
zero otherwise.
Note: In a compiled |:def| function the evaluation is done at
runtime. Use `exists_compiled()` to evaluate the expression
at compile time.
For checking for a supported feature use |has()|.
For checking if a file exists use |filereadable()|.
The {expr} argument is a string, which contains one of these:
varname internal variable (see
dict.key |internal-variables|). Also works
list[i] for |curly-braces-names|, |Dictionary|
import.Func entries, |List| items, imported
items, etc.
Does not work for local variables in a
compiled `:def` function.
Also works for a function in |Vim9|
script, since it can be used as a
function reference.
Beware that evaluating an index may
cause an error message for an invalid
expression. E.g.: >
:let l = [1, 2, 3]
:echo exists("l[5]")
< 0 >
:echo exists("l[xx]")
< E121: Undefined variable: xx
0
&option-name Vim option (only checks if it exists,
not if it really works)
+option-name Vim option that works.
$ENVNAME environment variable (could also be
done by comparing with an empty
string)
*funcname built-in function (see |functions|)
or user defined function (see
|user-functions|) that is implemented.
Also works for a variable that is a
Funcref.
?funcname built-in function that could be
implemented; to be used to check if
"funcname" is valid
:cmdname Ex command: built-in command, user
command or command modifier |:command|.
Returns:
1 for match with start of a command
2 full match with a command
3 matches several user commands
To check for a supported command
always check the return value to be 2.
:2match The |:2match| command.
:3match The |:3match| command (but you
probably should not use it, it is
reserved for internal usage)
#event autocommand defined for this event
#event#pattern autocommand defined for this event and
pattern (the pattern is taken
literally and compared to the
autocommand patterns character by
character)
#group autocommand group exists
#group#event autocommand defined for this group and
event.
#group#event#pattern
autocommand defined for this group,
event and pattern.
##event autocommand for this event is
supported.
Examples: >
exists("&shortname")
exists("$HOSTNAME")
exists("*strftime")
exists("*s:MyFunc") " only for legacy script
exists("*MyFunc")
exists("bufcount")
exists(":Make")
exists("#CursorHold")
exists("#BufReadPre#*.gz")
exists("#filetypeindent")
exists("#filetypeindent#FileType")
exists("#filetypeindent#FileType#*")
exists("##ColorScheme")
< There must be no space between the symbol (&/$/*/#) and the
name.
There must be no extra characters after the name, although in
a few cases this is ignored. That may become stricter in the
future, thus don't count on it!
Working example: >
exists(":make")
< NOT working example: >
exists(":make install")
< Note that the argument must be a string, not the name of the
variable itself. For example: >
exists(bufcount)
< This doesn't check for existence of the "bufcount" variable,
but gets the value of "bufcount", and checks if that exists.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Varname()->exists()
<
exists_compiled({expr}) *exists_compiled()*
Like `exists()` but evaluated at compile time. This is useful
to skip a block where a function is used that would otherwise
give an error: >
if exists_compiled('*ThatFunction')
ThatFunction('works')
endif
< If `exists()` were used then a compilation error would be
given if ThatFunction() is not defined.
{expr} must be a literal string. *E1232*
Can only be used in a |:def| function. *E1233*
This does not work to check for arguments or local variables.
exp({expr}) *exp()*
Return the exponential of {expr} as a |Float| in the range
[0, inf].
{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|.
Examples: >
:echo exp(2)
< 7.389056 >
:echo exp(-1)
< 0.367879
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Compute()->exp()
expand({string} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]]) *expand()*
Expand wildcards and the following special keywords in
{string}. 'wildignorecase' applies.
If {list} is given and it is |TRUE|, a List will be returned.
Otherwise the result is a String and when there are several
matches, they are separated by <NL> characters. [Note: in
version 5.0 a space was used, which caused problems when a
file name contains a space]
If the expansion fails, the result is an empty string. A name
for a non-existing file is not included, unless {string} does
not start with '%', '#' or '<', see below.
When {string} starts with '%', '#' or '<', the expansion is
done like for the |cmdline-special| variables with their
associated modifiers. Here is a short overview:
% current file name
# alternate file name
#n alternate file name n
<cfile> file name under the cursor
<afile> autocmd file name
<abuf> autocmd buffer number (as a String!)
<amatch> autocmd matched name
<cexpr> C expression under the cursor
<sfile> sourced script file or function name
<slnum> sourced script line number or function
line number
<sflnum> script file line number, also when in
a function
<SID> "<SNR>123_" where "123" is the
current script ID |<SID>|
<script> sourced script file, or script file
where the current function was defined
<stack> call stack
<cword> word under the cursor
<cWORD> WORD under the cursor
<client> the {clientid} of the last received
message |server2client()|
Modifiers:
:p expand to full path
:h head (last path component removed)
:t tail (last path component only)
:r root (one extension removed)
:e extension only
Example: >
:let &tags = expand("%:p:h") .. "/tags"
< Note that when expanding a string that starts with '%', '#' or
'<', any following text is ignored. This does NOT work: >
:let doesntwork = expand("%:h.bak")
< Use this: >
:let doeswork = expand("%:h") .. ".bak"
< Also note that expanding "<cfile>" and others only returns the
referenced file name without further expansion. If "<cfile>"
is "~/.cshrc", you need to do another expand() to have the
"~/" expanded into the path of the home directory: >
:echo expand(expand("<cfile>"))
<
There cannot be white space between the variables and the
following modifier. The |fnamemodify()| function can be used
to modify normal file names.
When using '%' or '#', and the current or alternate file name
is not defined, an empty string is used. Using "%:p" in a
buffer with no name, results in the current directory, with a
'/' added.
When 'verbose' is set then expanding '%', '#' and <> items
will result in an error message if the argument cannot be
expanded.
When {string} does not start with '%', '#' or '<', it is
expanded like a file name is expanded on the command line.
'suffixes' and 'wildignore' are used, unless the optional
{nosuf} argument is given and it is |TRUE|.
Names for non-existing files are included. The "**" item can
be used to search in a directory tree. For example, to find
all "README" files in the current directory and below: >
:echo expand("**/README")
<
expand() can also be used to expand variables and environment
variables that are only known in a shell. But this can be
slow, because a shell may be used to do the expansion. See
|expr-env-expand|.
The expanded variable is still handled like a list of file
names. When an environment variable cannot be expanded, it is
left unchanged. Thus ":echo expand('$FOOBAR')" results in
"$FOOBAR".
See |glob()| for finding existing files. See |system()| for
getting the raw output of an external command.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Getpattern()->expand()
expandcmd({string} [, {options}]) *expandcmd()*
Expand special items in String {string} like what is done for
an Ex command such as `:edit`. This expands special keywords,
like with |expand()|, and environment variables, anywhere in
{string}. "~user" and "~/path" are only expanded at the
start.
The following items are supported in the {options} Dict
argument:
errmsg If set to TRUE, error messages are displayed
if an error is encountered during expansion.
By default, error messages are not displayed.
Returns the expanded string. If an error is encountered
during expansion, the unmodified {string} is returned.
Example: >
:echo expandcmd('make %<.o')
make /path/runtime/doc/builtin.o
:echo expandcmd('make %<.o', {'errmsg': v:true})
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetCommand()->expandcmd()
<
extend({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}]) *extend()*
{expr1} and {expr2} must be both |Lists| or both
|Dictionaries|.
If they are |Lists|: Append {expr2} to {expr1}.
If {expr3} is given insert the items of {expr2} before the
item with index {expr3} in {expr1}. When {expr3} is zero
insert before the first item. When {expr3} is equal to
len({expr1}) then {expr2} is appended.
Examples: >
:echo sort(extend(mylist, [7, 5]))
:call extend(mylist, [2, 3], 1)
< When {expr1} is the same List as {expr2} then the number of
items copied is equal to the original length of the List.
E.g., when {expr3} is 1 you get N new copies of the first item
(where N is the original length of the List).
Use |add()| to concatenate one item to a list. To concatenate
two lists into a new list use the + operator: >
:let newlist = [1, 2, 3] + [4, 5]
<
If they are |Dictionaries|:
Add all entries from {expr2} to {expr1}.
If a key exists in both {expr1} and {expr2} then {expr3} is
used to decide what to do:
{expr3} = "keep": keep the value of {expr1}
{expr3} = "force": use the value of {expr2}
{expr3} = "error": give an error message *E737*
When {expr3} is omitted then "force" is assumed.
{expr1} is changed when {expr2} is not empty. If necessary
make a copy of {expr1} first.
{expr2} remains unchanged.
When {expr1} is locked and {expr2} is not empty the operation
fails.
Returns {expr1}. Returns 0 on error.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
mylist->extend(otherlist)
extendnew({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}]) *extendnew()*
Like |extend()| but instead of adding items to {expr1} a new
List or Dictionary is created and returned. {expr1} remains
unchanged.
feedkeys({string} [, {mode}]) *feedkeys()*
Characters in {string} are queued for processing as if they
come from a mapping or were typed by the user.
By default the string is added to the end of the typeahead
buffer, thus if a mapping is still being executed the
characters come after them. Use the 'i' flag to insert before
other characters, they will be executed next, before any
characters from a mapping.
The function does not wait for processing of keys contained in
{string}.
To include special keys into {string}, use double-quotes
and "\..." notation |expr-quote|. For example,
feedkeys("\<CR>") simulates pressing of the <Enter> key. But
feedkeys('\<CR>') pushes 5 characters.
A special code that might be useful is <Ignore>, it exits the
wait for a character without doing anything. *<Ignore>*
{mode} is a String, which can contain these character flags:
'm' Remap keys. This is default. If {mode} is absent,
keys are remapped.
'n' Do not remap keys.
't' Handle keys as if typed; otherwise they are handled as
if coming from a mapping. This matters for undo,
opening folds, etc.
'L' Lowlevel input. Only works for Unix or when using the
GUI. Keys are used as if they were coming from the
terminal. Other flags are not used. *E980*
When a CTRL-C interrupts and 't' is included it sets
the internal "got_int" flag.
'i' Insert the string instead of appending (see above).
'x' Execute commands until typeahead is empty. This is
similar to using ":normal!". You can call feedkeys()
several times without 'x' and then one time with 'x'
(possibly with an empty {string}) to execute all the
typeahead. Note that when Vim ends in Insert mode it
will behave as if <Esc> is typed, to avoid getting
stuck, waiting for a character to be typed before the
script continues.
Note that if you manage to call feedkeys() while
executing commands, thus calling it recursively, then
all typeahead will be consumed by the last call.
'c' Remove any script context when executing, so that
legacy script syntax applies, "s:var" does not work,
etc. Note that if the string being fed sets a script
context this still applies.
'!' When used with 'x' will not end Insert mode. Can be
used in a test when a timer is set to exit Insert mode
a little later. Useful for testing CursorHoldI.
Return value is always 0.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetInput()->feedkeys()
filereadable({file}) *filereadable()*
The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| when a file with the
name {file} exists, and can be read. If {file} doesn't exist,
or is a directory, the result is |FALSE|. {file} is any
expression, which is used as a String.
If you don't care about the file being readable you can use
|glob()|.
{file} is used as-is, you may want to expand wildcards first: >
echo filereadable('~/.vimrc')
0
echo filereadable(expand('~/.vimrc'))
1
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetName()->filereadable()
< *file_readable()*
Obsolete name: file_readable().
filewritable({file}) *filewritable()*
The result is a Number, which is 1 when a file with the
name {file} exists, and can be written. If {file} doesn't
exist, or is not writable, the result is 0. If {file} is a
directory, and we can write to it, the result is 2.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetName()->filewritable()
filter({expr1}, {expr2}) *filter()*
{expr1} must be a |List|, |String|, |Blob| or |Dictionary|.
For each item in {expr1} evaluate {expr2} and when the result
is zero or false remove the item from the |List| or
|Dictionary|. Similarly for each byte in a |Blob| and each
character in a |String|.
{expr2} must be a |string| or |Funcref|.
If {expr2} is a |string|, inside {expr2} |v:val| has the value
of the current item. For a |Dictionary| |v:key| has the key
of the current item and for a |List| |v:key| has the index of
the current item. For a |Blob| |v:key| has the index of the
current byte. For a |String| |v:key| has the index of the
current character.
Examples: >
call filter(mylist, 'v:val !~ "OLD"')
< Removes the items where "OLD" appears. >
call filter(mydict, 'v:key >= 8')
< Removes the items with a key below 8. >
call filter(var, 0)
< Removes all the items, thus clears the |List| or |Dictionary|.
Note that {expr2} is the result of expression and is then
used as an expression again. Often it is good to use a
|literal-string| to avoid having to double backslashes.
If {expr2} is a |Funcref| it must take two arguments:
1. the key or the index of the current item.
2. the value of the current item.
The function must return |TRUE| if the item should be kept.
Example that keeps the odd items of a list: >
func Odd(idx, val)
return a:idx % 2 == 1
endfunc
call filter(mylist, function('Odd'))
< It is shorter when using a |lambda|. In |Vim9| syntax: >
call filter(myList, (idx, val) => idx * val <= 42)
< In legacy script syntax: >
call filter(myList, {idx, val -> idx * val <= 42})
< If you do not use "val" you can leave it out: >
call filter(myList, {idx -> idx % 2 == 1})
<
In |Vim9| script the result must be true, false, zero or one.
Other values will result in a type error.
For a |List| and a |Dictionary| the operation is done
in-place. If you want it to remain unmodified make a copy
first: >
:let l = filter(copy(mylist), 'v:val =~ "KEEP"')
< Returns {expr1}, the |List| or |Dictionary| that was filtered,
or a new |Blob| or |String|.
When an error is encountered while evaluating {expr2} no
further items in {expr1} are processed.
When {expr2} is a Funcref errors inside a function are ignored,
unless it was defined with the "abort" flag.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
mylist->filter(expr2)
finddir({name} [, {path} [, {count}]]) *finddir()*
Find directory {name} in {path}. Supports both downwards and
upwards recursive directory searches. See |file-searching|
for the syntax of {path}.
Returns the path of the first found match. When the found
directory is below the current directory a relative path is
returned. Otherwise a full path is returned.
If {path} is omitted or empty then 'path' is used.
If the optional {count} is given, find {count}'s occurrence of
{name} in {path} instead of the first one.
When {count} is negative return all the matches in a |List|.
Returns an empty string if the directory is not found.
This is quite similar to the ex-command `:find`.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetName()->finddir()
findfile({name} [, {path} [, {count}]]) *findfile()*
Just like |finddir()|, but find a file instead of a directory.
Uses 'suffixesadd'.
Example: >
:echo findfile("tags.vim", ".;")
< Searches from the directory of the current file upwards until
it finds the file "tags.vim".
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetName()->findfile()
flatten({list} [, {maxdepth}]) *flatten()*
Flatten {list} up to {maxdepth} levels. Without {maxdepth}
the result is a |List| without nesting, as if {maxdepth} is
a very large number.
The {list} is changed in place, use |flattennew()| if you do
not want that.
In Vim9 script flatten() cannot be used, you must always use
|flattennew()|.
*E900*
{maxdepth} means how deep in nested lists changes are made.
{list} is not modified when {maxdepth} is 0.
{maxdepth} must be positive number.
If there is an error the number zero is returned.
Example: >
:echo flatten([1, [2, [3, 4]], 5])
< [1, 2, 3, 4, 5] >
:echo flatten([1, [2, [3, 4]], 5], 1)
< [1, 2, [3, 4], 5]
Can also be used as a |method|: >
mylist->flatten()
<
flattennew({list} [, {maxdepth}]) *flattennew()*
Like |flatten()| but first make a copy of {list}.
float2nr({expr}) *float2nr()*
Convert {expr} to a Number by omitting the part after the
decimal point.
{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
Returns 0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|.
When the value of {expr} is out of range for a |Number| the
result is truncated to 0x7fffffff or -0x7fffffff (or when
64-bit Number support is enabled, 0x7fffffffffffffff or
-0x7fffffffffffffff). NaN results in -0x80000000 (or when
64-bit Number support is enabled, -0x8000000000000000).
Examples: >
echo float2nr(3.95)
< 3 >
echo float2nr(-23.45)
< -23 >
echo float2nr(1.0e100)
< 2147483647 (or 9223372036854775807) >
echo float2nr(-1.0e150)
< -2147483647 (or -9223372036854775807) >
echo float2nr(1.0e-100)
< 0
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Compute()->float2nr()
floor({expr}) *floor()*
Return the largest integral value less than or equal to
{expr} as a |Float| (round down).
{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|.
Examples: >
echo floor(1.856)
< 1.0 >
echo floor(-5.456)
< -6.0 >
echo floor(4.0)
< 4.0
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Compute()->floor()
fmod({expr1}, {expr2}) *fmod()*
Return the remainder of {expr1} / {expr2}, even if the
division is not representable. Returns {expr1} - i * {expr2}
for some integer i such that if {expr2} is non-zero, the
result has the same sign as {expr1} and magnitude less than
the magnitude of {expr2}. If {expr2} is zero, the value
returned is zero. The value returned is a |Float|.
{expr1} and {expr2} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
Returns 0.0 if {expr1} or {expr2} is not a |Float| or a
|Number|.
Examples: >
:echo fmod(12.33, 1.22)
< 0.13 >
:echo fmod(-12.33, 1.22)
< -0.13
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Compute()->fmod(1.22)
fnameescape({string}) *fnameescape()*
Escape {string} for use as file name command argument. All
characters that have a special meaning, such as '%' and '|'
are escaped with a backslash.
For most systems the characters escaped are
" \t\n*?[{`$\\%#'\"|!<". For systems where a backslash
appears in a filename, it depends on the value of 'isfname'.
A leading '+' and '>' is also escaped (special after |:edit|
and |:write|). And a "-" by itself (special after |:cd|).
Returns an empty string on error.
Example: >
:let fname = '+some str%nge|name'
:exe "edit " .. fnameescape(fname)
< results in executing: >
edit \+some\ str\%nge\|name
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetName()->fnameescape()
fnamemodify({fname}, {mods}) *fnamemodify()*
Modify file name {fname} according to {mods}. {mods} is a
string of characters like it is used for file names on the
command line. See |filename-modifiers|.
Example: >
:echo fnamemodify("main.c", ":p:h")
< results in: >
/home/user/vim/vim/src
< If {mods} is empty or an unsupported modifier is used then
{fname} is returned.
When {fname} is empty then with {mods} ":h" returns ".", so
that `:cd` can be used with it. This is different from
expand('%:h') without a buffer name, which returns an empty
string.
Note: Environment variables don't work in {fname}, use
|expand()| first then.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetName()->fnamemodify(':p:h')
foldclosed({lnum}) *foldclosed()*
The result is a Number. If the line {lnum} is in a closed
fold, the result is the number of the first line in that fold.
If the line {lnum} is not in a closed fold, -1 is returned.
{lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current
line, "'m" mark m, etc.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetLnum()->foldclosed()
foldclosedend({lnum}) *foldclosedend()*
The result is a Number. If the line {lnum} is in a closed
fold, the result is the number of the last line in that fold.
If the line {lnum} is not in a closed fold, -1 is returned.
{lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current
line, "'m" mark m, etc.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetLnum()->foldclosedend()
foldlevel({lnum}) *foldlevel()*
The result is a Number, which is the foldlevel of line {lnum}
in the current buffer. For nested folds the deepest level is
returned. If there is no fold at line {lnum}, zero is
returned. It doesn't matter if the folds are open or closed.
When used while updating folds (from 'foldexpr') -1 is
returned for lines where folds are still to be updated and the
foldlevel is unknown. As a special case the level of the
previous line is usually available.
{lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current
line, "'m" mark m, etc.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetLnum()->foldlevel()
<
*foldtext()*
foldtext() Returns a String, to be displayed for a closed fold. This is
the default function used for the 'foldtext' option and should
only be called from evaluating 'foldtext'. It uses the
|v:foldstart|, |v:foldend| and |v:folddashes| variables.
The returned string looks like this: >
+-- 45 lines: abcdef
< The number of leading dashes depends on the foldlevel. The
"45" is the number of lines in the fold. "abcdef" is the text
in the first non-blank line of the fold. Leading white space,
"//" or "/*" and the text from the 'foldmarker' and
'commentstring' options is removed.
When used to draw the actual foldtext, the rest of the line
will be filled with the fold char from the 'fillchars'
setting.
Returns an empty string when there is no fold.
{not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature}
foldtextresult({lnum}) *foldtextresult()*
Returns the text that is displayed for the closed fold at line
{lnum}. Evaluates 'foldtext' in the appropriate context.
When there is no closed fold at {lnum} an empty string is
returned.
{lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current
line, "'m" mark m, etc.
Useful when exporting folded text, e.g., to HTML.
{not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature}
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetLnum()->foldtextresult()
<
*foreground()*
foreground() Move the Vim window to the foreground. Useful when sent from
a client to a Vim server. |remote_send()|
On Win32 systems this might not work, the OS does not always
allow a window to bring itself to the foreground. Use
|remote_foreground()| instead.
{only in the Win32, Motif and GTK GUI versions and the
Win32 console version}
fullcommand({name} [, {vim9}]) *fullcommand()*
Get the full command name from a short abbreviated command
name; see |20.2| for details on command abbreviations.
The string argument {name} may start with a `:` and can
include a [range], these are skipped and not returned.
Returns an empty string if a command doesn't exist, if it's
ambiguous (for user-defined commands) or cannot be shortened
this way. |vim9-no-shorten|
Without the {vim9} argument uses the current script version.
If {vim9} is present and FALSE then legacy script rules are
used. When {vim9} is present and TRUE then Vim9 rules are
used, e.g. "en" is not a short form of "endif".
For example `fullcommand('s')`, `fullcommand('sub')`,
`fullcommand(':%substitute')` all return "substitute".
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetName()->fullcommand()
<
*funcref()*
funcref({name} [, {arglist}] [, {dict}])
Just like |function()|, but the returned Funcref will lookup
the function by reference, not by name. This matters when the
function {name} is redefined later.
Unlike |function()|, {name} must be an existing user function.
It only works for an autoloaded function if it has already
been loaded (to avoid mistakenly loading the autoload script
when only intending to use the function name, use |function()|
instead). {name} cannot be a builtin function.
Returns 0 on error.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetFuncname()->funcref([arg])
<
*function()* *partial* *E700* *E922* *E923*
function({name} [, {arglist}] [, {dict}])
Return a |Funcref| variable that refers to function {name}.
{name} can be the name of a user defined function or an
internal function.
{name} can also be a Funcref or a partial. When it is a
partial the dict stored in it will be used and the {dict}
argument is not allowed. E.g.: >
let FuncWithArg = function(dict.Func, [arg])
let Broken = function(dict.Func, [arg], dict)
<
When using the Funcref the function will be found by {name},
also when it was redefined later. Use |funcref()| to keep the
same function.
When {arglist} or {dict} is present this creates a partial.
That means the argument list and/or the dictionary is stored in
the Funcref and will be used when the Funcref is called.
The arguments are passed to the function in front of other
arguments, but after any argument from |method|. Example: >
func Callback(arg1, arg2, name)
...
let Partial = function('Callback', ['one', 'two'])
...
call Partial('name')
< Invokes the function as with: >
call Callback('one', 'two', 'name')
< With a |method|: >
func Callback(one, two, three)
...
let Partial = function('Callback', ['two'])
...
eval 'one'->Partial('three')
< Invokes the function as with: >
call Callback('one', 'two', 'three')
< The function() call can be nested to add more arguments to the
Funcref. The extra arguments are appended to the list of
arguments. Example: >
func Callback(arg1, arg2, name)
"...
let Func = function('Callback', ['one'])
let Func2 = function(Func, ['two'])
"...
call Func2('name')
< Invokes the function as with: >
call Callback('one', 'two', 'name')
< The Dictionary is only useful when calling a "dict" function.
In that case the {dict} is passed in as "self". Example: >
function Callback() dict
echo "called for " .. self.name
endfunction
"...
let context = {"name": "example"}
let Func = function('Callback', context)
"...
call Func() " will echo: called for example
< The use of function() is not needed when there are no extra
arguments, these two are equivalent, if Callback() is defined
as context.Callback(): >
let Func = function('Callback', context)
let Func = context.Callback
< The argument list and the Dictionary can be combined: >
function Callback(arg1, count) dict
"...
let context = {"name": "example"}
let Func = function('Callback', ['one'], context)
"...
call Func(500)
< Invokes the function as with: >
call context.Callback('one', 500)
<
Returns 0 on error.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetFuncname()->function([arg])
garbagecollect([{atexit}]) *garbagecollect()*
Cleanup unused |Lists|, |Dictionaries|, |Channels| and |Jobs|
that have circular references.
There is hardly ever a need to invoke this function, as it is
automatically done when Vim runs out of memory or is waiting
for the user to press a key after 'updatetime'. Items without
circular references are always freed when they become unused.
This is useful if you have deleted a very big |List| and/or
|Dictionary| with circular references in a script that runs
for a long time.
When the optional {atexit} argument is one, garbage
collection will also be done when exiting Vim, if it wasn't
done before. This is useful when checking for memory leaks.
The garbage collection is not done immediately but only when
it's safe to perform. This is when waiting for the user to
type a character. To force garbage collection immediately use
|test_garbagecollect_now()|.
get({list}, {idx} [, {default}]) *get()*
Get item {idx} from |List| {list}. When this item is not
available return {default}. Return zero when {default} is
omitted.
Preferably used as a |method|: >
mylist->get(idx)
get({blob}, {idx} [, {default}])
Get byte {idx} from |Blob| {blob}. When this byte is not
available return {default}. Return -1 when {default} is
omitted.
Preferably used as a |method|: >
myblob->get(idx)
get({dict}, {key} [, {default}])
Get item with key {key} from |Dictionary| {dict}. When this
item is not available return {default}. Return zero when
{default} is omitted. Useful example: >
let val = get(g:, 'var_name', 'default')
< This gets the value of g:var_name if it exists, and uses
'default' when it does not exist.
Preferably used as a |method|: >
mydict->get(key)
get({func}, {what})
Get item {what} from Funcref {func}. Possible values for
{what} are:
"name" The function name
"func" The function
"dict" The dictionary
"args" The list with arguments
Returns zero on error.
Preferably used as a |method|: >
myfunc->get(what)
<
*getbufinfo()*
getbufinfo([{buf}])
getbufinfo([{dict}])
Get information about buffers as a List of Dictionaries.
Without an argument information about all the buffers is
returned.
When the argument is a |Dictionary| only the buffers matching
the specified criteria are returned. The following keys can
be specified in {dict}:
buflisted include only listed buffers.
bufloaded include only loaded buffers.
bufmodified include only modified buffers.
Otherwise, {buf} specifies a particular buffer to return
information for. For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()|
above. If the buffer is found the returned List has one item.
Otherwise the result is an empty list.
Each returned List item is a dictionary with the following
entries:
bufnr Buffer number.
changed TRUE if the buffer is modified.
changedtick Number of changes made to the buffer.
hidden TRUE if the buffer is hidden.
lastused Timestamp in seconds, like
|localtime()|, when the buffer was
last used.
{only with the |+viminfo| feature}
listed TRUE if the buffer is listed.
lnum Line number used for the buffer when
opened in the current window.
Only valid if the buffer has been
displayed in the window in the past.
If you want the line number of the
last known cursor position in a given
window, use |line()|: >
:echo line('.', {winid})
<
linecount Number of lines in the buffer (only
valid when loaded)
loaded TRUE if the buffer is loaded.
name Full path to the file in the buffer.
signs List of signs placed in the buffer.
Each list item is a dictionary with
the following fields:
id sign identifier
lnum line number
name sign name
variables A reference to the dictionary with
buffer-local variables.
windows List of |window-ID|s that display this
buffer
popups List of popup |window-ID|s that
display this buffer
Examples: >
for buf in getbufinfo()
echo buf.name
endfor
for buf in getbufinfo({'buflisted':1})
if buf.changed
....
endif
endfor
<
To get buffer-local options use: >
getbufvar({bufnr}, '&option_name')
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetBufnr()->getbufinfo()
<
*getbufline()*
getbufline({buf}, {lnum} [, {end}])
Return a |List| with the lines starting from {lnum} to {end}
(inclusive) in the buffer {buf}. If {end} is omitted, a
|List| with only the line {lnum} is returned. See
`getbufoneline()` for only getting the line.
For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above.
For {lnum} and {end} "$" can be used for the last line of the
buffer. Otherwise a number must be used.
When {lnum} is smaller than 1 or bigger than the number of
lines in the buffer, an empty |List| is returned.
When {end} is greater than the number of lines in the buffer,
it is treated as {end} is set to the number of lines in the
buffer. When {end} is before {lnum} an empty |List| is
returned.
This function works only for loaded buffers. For unloaded and
non-existing buffers, an empty |List| is returned.
Example: >
:let lines = getbufline(bufnr("myfile"), 1, "$")
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetBufnr()->getbufline(lnum)
<
*getbufoneline()*
getbufoneline({buf}, {lnum})
Just like `getbufline()` but only get one line and return it
as a string.
getbufvar({buf}, {varname} [, {def}]) *getbufvar()*
The result is the value of option or local buffer variable
{varname} in buffer {buf}. Note that the name without "b:"
must be used.
The {varname} argument is a string.
When {varname} is empty returns a |Dictionary| with all the
buffer-local variables.
When {varname} is equal to "&" returns a |Dictionary| with all
the buffer-local options.
Otherwise, when {varname} starts with "&" returns the value of
a buffer-local option.
This also works for a global or buffer-local option, but it
doesn't work for a global variable, window-local variable or
window-local option.
For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above.
When the buffer or variable doesn't exist {def} or an empty
string is returned, there is no error message.
Examples: >
:let bufmodified = getbufvar(1, "&mod")
:echo "todo myvar = " .. getbufvar("todo", "myvar")
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetBufnr()->getbufvar(varname)
<
getcellwidths() *getcellwidths()*
Returns a |List| of cell widths of character ranges overridden
by |setcellwidths()|. The format is equal to the argument of
|setcellwidths()|. If no character ranges have their cell
widths overridden, an empty List is returned.
getchangelist([{buf}]) *getchangelist()*
Returns the |changelist| for the buffer {buf}. For the use
of {buf}, see |bufname()| above. If buffer {buf} doesn't
exist, an empty list is returned.
The returned list contains two entries: a list with the change
locations and the current position in the list. Each
entry in the change list is a dictionary with the following
entries:
col column number
coladd column offset for 'virtualedit'
lnum line number
If buffer {buf} is the current buffer, then the current
position refers to the position in the list. For other
buffers, it is set to the length of the list.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetBufnr()->getchangelist()
getchar([expr]) *getchar()*
Get a single character from the user or input stream.
If [expr] is omitted, wait until a character is available.
If [expr] is 0, only get a character when one is available.
Return zero otherwise.
If [expr] is 1, only check if a character is available, it is
not consumed. Return zero if no character available.
If you prefer always getting a string use |getcharstr()|.
Without [expr] and when [expr] is 0 a whole character or
special key is returned. If it is a single character, the
result is a Number. Use |nr2char()| to convert it to a String.
Otherwise a String is returned with the encoded character.
For a special key it's a String with a sequence of bytes
starting with 0x80 (decimal: 128). This is the same value as
the String "\<Key>", e.g., "\<Left>". The returned value is
also a String when a modifier (shift, control, alt) was used
that is not included in the character.
When [expr] is 0 and Esc is typed, there will be a short delay
while Vim waits to see if this is the start of an escape
sequence.
When [expr] is 1 only the first byte is returned. For a
one-byte character it is the character itself as a number.
Use nr2char() to convert it to a String.
Use getcharmod() to obtain any additional modifiers.
When the user clicks a mouse button, the mouse event will be
returned. The position can then be found in |v:mouse_col|,
|v:mouse_lnum|, |v:mouse_winid| and |v:mouse_win|.
|getmousepos()| can also be used. Mouse move events will be
ignored.
This example positions the mouse as it would normally happen: >
let c = getchar()
if c == "\<LeftMouse>" && v:mouse_win > 0
exe v:mouse_win .. "wincmd w"
exe v:mouse_lnum
exe "normal " .. v:mouse_col .. "|"
endif
<
When using bracketed paste only the first character is
returned, the rest of the pasted text is dropped.
|xterm-bracketed-paste|.
There is no prompt, you will somehow have to make clear to the
user that a character has to be typed. The screen is not
redrawn, e.g. when resizing the window. When using a popup
window it should work better with a |popup-filter|.
There is no mapping for the character.
Key codes are replaced, thus when the user presses the <Del>
key you get the code for the <Del> key, not the raw character
sequence. Examples: >
getchar() == "\<Del>"
getchar() == "\<S-Left>"
< This example redefines "f" to ignore case: >
:nmap f :call FindChar()<CR>
:function FindChar()
: let c = nr2char(getchar())
: while col('.') < col('$') - 1
: normal l
: if getline('.')[col('.') - 1] ==? c
: break
: endif
: endwhile
:endfunction
<
You may also receive synthetic characters, such as
|<CursorHold>|. Often you will want to ignore this and get
another character: >
:function GetKey()
: let c = getchar()
: while c == "\<CursorHold>"
: let c = getchar()
: endwhile
: return c
:endfunction
getcharmod() *getcharmod()*
The result is a Number which is the state of the modifiers for
the last obtained character with getchar() or in another way.
These values are added together:
2 shift
4 control
8 alt (meta)
16 meta (when it's different from ALT)
32 mouse double click
64 mouse triple click
96 mouse quadruple click (== 32 + 64)
128 command (Macintosh only)
Only the modifiers that have not been included in the
character itself are obtained. Thus Shift-a results in "A"
without a modifier. Returns 0 if no modifiers are used.
*getcharpos()*
getcharpos({expr})
Get the position for String {expr}. Same as |getpos()| but the
column number in the returned List is a character index
instead of a byte index.
If |getpos()| returns a very large column number, equal to
|v:maxcol|, then getcharpos() will return the character index
of the last character.
Example:
With the cursor on '세' in line 5 with text "여보세요": >
getcharpos('.') returns [0, 5, 3, 0]
getpos('.') returns [0, 5, 7, 0]
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetMark()->getcharpos()
getcharsearch() *getcharsearch()*
Return the current character search information as a {dict}
with the following entries:
char character previously used for a character
search (|t|, |f|, |T|, or |F|); empty string
if no character search has been performed
forward direction of character search; 1 for forward,
0 for backward
until type of character search; 1 for a |t| or |T|
character search, 0 for an |f| or |F|
character search
This can be useful to always have |;| and |,| search
forward/backward regardless of the direction of the previous
character search: >
:nnoremap <expr> ; getcharsearch().forward ? ';' : ','
:nnoremap <expr> , getcharsearch().forward ? ',' : ';'
< Also see |setcharsearch()|.
getcharstr([expr]) *getcharstr()*
Get a single character from the user or input stream as a
string.
If [expr] is omitted, wait until a character is available.
If [expr] is 0 or false, only get a character when one is
available. Return an empty string otherwise.
If [expr] is 1 or true, only check if a character is
available, it is not consumed. Return an empty string
if no character is available.
Otherwise this works like |getchar()|, except that a number
result is converted to a string.
getcmdcompltype() *getcmdcompltype()*
Return the type of the current command-line completion.
Only works when the command line is being edited, thus
requires use of |c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=|.
See |:command-completion| for the return string.
Also see |getcmdtype()|, |setcmdpos()|, |getcmdline()| and
|setcmdline()|.
Returns an empty string when completion is not defined.
getcmdline() *getcmdline()*
Return the current command-line. Only works when the command
line is being edited, thus requires use of |c_CTRL-\_e| or
|c_CTRL-R_=|.
Example: >
:cmap <F7> <C-\>eescape(getcmdline(), ' \')<CR>
< Also see |getcmdtype()|, |getcmdpos()|, |setcmdpos()| and
|setcmdline()|.
Returns an empty string when entering a password or using
|inputsecret()|.
getcmdpos() *getcmdpos()*
Return the position of the cursor in the command line as a
byte count. The first column is 1.
Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of
|c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=| or an expression mapping.
Returns 0 otherwise.
Also see |getcmdtype()|, |setcmdpos()|, |getcmdline()| and
|setcmdline()|.
getcmdscreenpos() *getcmdscreenpos()*
Return the screen position of the cursor in the command line
as a byte count. The first column is 1.
Instead of |getcmdpos()|, it adds the prompt position.
Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of
|c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=| or an expression mapping.
Returns 0 otherwise.
Also see |getcmdpos()|, |setcmdpos()|, |getcmdline()| and
|setcmdline()|.
getcmdtype() *getcmdtype()*
Return the current command-line type. Possible return values
are:
: normal Ex command
> debug mode command |debug-mode|
/ forward search command
? backward search command
@ |input()| command
- |:insert| or |:append| command
= |i_CTRL-R_=|
Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of
|c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=| or an expression mapping.
Returns an empty string otherwise.
Also see |getcmdpos()|, |setcmdpos()| and |getcmdline()|.
getcmdwintype() *getcmdwintype()*
Return the current |command-line-window| type. Possible return
values are the same as |getcmdtype()|. Returns an empty string
when not in the command-line window.
getcompletion({pat}, {type} [, {filtered}]) *getcompletion()*
Return a list of command-line completion matches. The String
{type} argument specifies what for. The following completion
types are supported:
arglist file names in argument list
augroup autocmd groups
buffer buffer names
behave |:behave| suboptions
breakpoint |:breakadd| and |:breakdel| suboptions
color color schemes
command Ex command
cmdline |cmdline-completion| result
compiler compilers
cscope |:cscope| suboptions
diff_buffer |:diffget| and |:diffput| completion
dir directory names
environment environment variable names
event autocommand events
expression Vim expression
file file and directory names
file_in_path file and directory names in |'path'|
filetype filetype names |'filetype'|
function function name
help help subjects
highlight highlight groups
history |:history| suboptions
locale locale names (as output of locale -a)
mapclear buffer argument
mapping mapping name
menu menus
messages |:messages| suboptions
option options
packadd optional package |pack-add| names
runtime |:runtime| completion
scriptnames sourced script names |:scriptnames|
shellcmd Shell command
sign |:sign| suboptions
syntax syntax file names |'syntax'|
syntime |:syntime| suboptions
tag tags
tag_listfiles tags, file names
user user names
var user variables
If {pat} is an empty string, then all the matches are
returned. Otherwise only items matching {pat} are returned.
See |wildcards| for the use of special characters in {pat}.
If the optional {filtered} flag is set to 1, then 'wildignore'
is applied to filter the results. Otherwise all the matches
are returned. The 'wildignorecase' option always applies.
If the 'wildoptions' option contains 'fuzzy', then fuzzy
matching is used to get the completion matches. Otherwise
regular expression matching is used. Thus this function
follows the user preference, what happens on the command line.
If you do not want this you can make 'wildoptions' empty
before calling getcompletion() and restore it afterwards.
If {type} is "cmdline", then the |cmdline-completion| result is
returned. For example, to complete the possible values after
a ":call" command: >
echo getcompletion('call ', 'cmdline')
<
If there are no matches, an empty list is returned. An
invalid value for {type} produces an error.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetPattern()->getcompletion('color')
<
*getcurpos()*
getcurpos([{winid}])
Get the position of the cursor. This is like getpos('.'), but
includes an extra "curswant" item in the list:
[0, lnum, col, off, curswant] ~
The "curswant" number is the preferred column when moving the
cursor vertically. After |$| command it will be a very large
number equal to |v:maxcol|. Also see |getcursorcharpos()| and
|getpos()|.
The first "bufnum" item is always zero. The byte position of
the cursor is returned in 'col'. To get the character
position, use |getcursorcharpos()|.
The optional {winid} argument can specify the window. It can
be the window number or the |window-ID|. The last known
cursor position is returned, this may be invalid for the
current value of the buffer if it is not the current window.
If {winid} is invalid a list with zeroes is returned.
This can be used to save and restore the cursor position: >
let save_cursor = getcurpos()
MoveTheCursorAround
call setpos('.', save_cursor)
< Note that this only works within the window. See
|winrestview()| for restoring more state.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWinid()->getcurpos()
<
*getcursorcharpos()*
getcursorcharpos([{winid}])
Same as |getcurpos()| but the column number in the returned
List is a character index instead of a byte index.
Example:
With the cursor on '보' in line 3 with text "여보세요": >
getcursorcharpos() returns [0, 3, 2, 0, 3]
getcurpos() returns [0, 3, 4, 0, 3]
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWinid()->getcursorcharpos()
< *getcwd()*
getcwd([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]])
The result is a String, which is the name of the current
working directory. 'autochdir' is ignored.
With {winnr} return the local current directory of this window
in the current tab page. {winnr} can be the window number or
the |window-ID|.
If {winnr} is -1 return the name of the global working
directory. See also |haslocaldir()|.
With {winnr} and {tabnr} return the local current directory of
the window in the specified tab page. If {winnr} is -1 return
the working directory of the tabpage.
If {winnr} is zero use the current window, if {tabnr} is zero
use the current tabpage.
Without any arguments, return the actual working directory of
the current window.
Return an empty string if the arguments are invalid.
Examples: >
" Get the working directory of the current window
:echo getcwd()
:echo getcwd(0)
:echo getcwd(0, 0)
" Get the working directory of window 3 in tabpage 2
:echo getcwd(3, 2)
" Get the global working directory
:echo getcwd(-1)
" Get the working directory of tabpage 3
:echo getcwd(-1, 3)
" Get the working directory of current tabpage
:echo getcwd(-1, 0)
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWinnr()->getcwd()
getenv({name}) *getenv()*
Return the value of environment variable {name}. The {name}
argument is a string, without a leading '$'. Example: >
myHome = getenv('HOME')
< When the variable does not exist |v:null| is returned. That
is different from a variable set to an empty string, although
some systems interpret the empty value as the variable being
deleted. See also |expr-env|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetVarname()->getenv()
getfontname([{name}]) *getfontname()*
Without an argument returns the name of the normal font being
used. Like what is used for the Normal highlight group
|hl-Normal|.
With an argument a check is done whether String {name} is a
valid font name. If not then an empty string is returned.
Otherwise the actual font name is returned, or {name} if the
GUI does not support obtaining the real name.
Only works when the GUI is running, thus not in your vimrc or
gvimrc file. Use the |GUIEnter| autocommand to use this
function just after the GUI has started.
Note that the GTK GUI accepts any font name, thus checking for
a valid name does not work.
getfperm({fname}) *getfperm()*
The result is a String, which is the read, write, and execute
permissions of the given file {fname}.
If {fname} does not exist or its directory cannot be read, an
empty string is returned.
The result is of the form "rwxrwxrwx", where each group of
"rwx" flags represent, in turn, the permissions of the owner
of the file, the group the file belongs to, and other users.
If a user does not have a given permission the flag for this
is replaced with the string "-". Examples: >
:echo getfperm("/etc/passwd")
:echo getfperm(expand("~/.vimrc"))
< This will hopefully (from a security point of view) display
the string "rw-r--r--" or even "rw-------".
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetFilename()->getfperm()
<
For setting permissions use |setfperm()|.
getfsize({fname}) *getfsize()*
The result is a Number, which is the size in bytes of the
given file {fname}.
If {fname} is a directory, 0 is returned.
If the file {fname} can't be found, -1 is returned.
If the size of {fname} is too big to fit in a Number then -2
is returned.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetFilename()->getfsize()
getftime({fname}) *getftime()*
The result is a Number, which is the last modification time of
the given file {fname}. The value is measured as seconds
since 1st Jan 1970, and may be passed to strftime(). See also
|localtime()| and |strftime()|.
If the file {fname} can't be found -1 is returned.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetFilename()->getftime()
getftype({fname}) *getftype()*
The result is a String, which is a description of the kind of
file of the given file {fname}.
If {fname} does not exist an empty string is returned.
Here is a table over different kinds of files and their
results:
Normal file "file"
Directory "dir"
Symbolic link "link"
Block device "bdev"
Character device "cdev"
Socket "socket"
FIFO "fifo"
All other "other"
Example: >
getftype("/home")
< Note that a type such as "link" will only be returned on
systems that support it. On some systems only "dir" and
"file" are returned. On MS-Windows a symbolic link to a
directory returns "dir" instead of "link".
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetFilename()->getftype()
getimstatus() *getimstatus()*
The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| when the IME status is
active and |FALSE| otherwise.
See 'imstatusfunc'.
getjumplist([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]]) *getjumplist()*
Returns the |jumplist| for the specified window.
Without arguments use the current window.
With {winnr} only use this window in the current tab page.
{winnr} can also be a |window-ID|.
With {winnr} and {tabnr} use the window in the specified tab
page. If {winnr} or {tabnr} is invalid, an empty list is
returned.
The returned list contains two entries: a list with the jump
locations and the last used jump position number in the list.
Each entry in the jump location list is a dictionary with
the following entries:
bufnr buffer number
col column number
coladd column offset for 'virtualedit'
filename filename if available
lnum line number
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWinnr()->getjumplist()
< *getline()*
getline({lnum} [, {end}])
Without {end} the result is a String, which is line {lnum}
from the current buffer. Example: >
getline(1)
< When {lnum} is a String that doesn't start with a
digit, |line()| is called to translate the String into a Number.
To get the line under the cursor: >
getline(".")
< When {lnum} is a number smaller than 1 or bigger than the
number of lines in the buffer, an empty string is returned.
When {end} is given the result is a |List| where each item is
a line from the current buffer in the range {lnum} to {end},
including line {end}.
{end} is used in the same way as {lnum}.
Non-existing lines are silently omitted.
When {end} is before {lnum} an empty |List| is returned.
Example: >
:let start = line('.')
:let end = search("^$") - 1
:let lines = getline(start, end)
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
ComputeLnum()->getline()
< To get lines from another buffer see |getbufline()| and
|getbufoneline()|
getloclist({nr} [, {what}]) *getloclist()*
Returns a |List| with all the entries in the location list for
window {nr}. {nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
When {nr} is zero the current window is used.
For a location list window, the displayed location list is
returned. For an invalid window number {nr}, an empty list is
returned. Otherwise, same as |getqflist()|.
If the optional {what} dictionary argument is supplied, then
returns the items listed in {what} as a dictionary. Refer to
|getqflist()| for the supported items in {what}.
In addition to the items supported by |getqflist()| in {what},
the following item is supported by |getloclist()|:
filewinid id of the window used to display files
from the location list. This field is
applicable only when called from a
location list window. See
|location-list-file-window| for more
details.
Returns a |Dictionary| with default values if there is no
location list for the window {nr}.
Returns an empty Dictionary if window {nr} does not exist.
Examples (See also |getqflist-examples|): >
:echo getloclist(3, {'all': 0})
:echo getloclist(5, {'filewinid': 0})
getmarklist([{buf}]) *getmarklist()*
Without the {buf} argument returns a |List| with information
about all the global marks. |mark|
If the optional {buf} argument is specified, returns the
local marks defined in buffer {buf}. For the use of {buf},
see |bufname()|. If {buf} is invalid, an empty list is
returned.
Each item in the returned List is a |Dict| with the following:
mark name of the mark prefixed by "'"
pos a |List| with the position of the mark:
[bufnum, lnum, col, off]
Refer to |getpos()| for more information.
file file name
Refer to |getpos()| for getting information about a specific
mark.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetBufnr()->getmarklist()
getmatches([{win}]) *getmatches()*
Returns a |List| with all matches previously defined for the
current window by |matchadd()| and the |:match| commands.
|getmatches()| is useful in combination with |setmatches()|,
as |setmatches()| can restore a list of matches saved by
|getmatches()|.
If {win} is specified, use the window with this number or
window ID instead of the current window. If {win} is invalid,
an empty list is returned.
Example: >
:echo getmatches()
< [{'group': 'MyGroup1', 'pattern': 'TODO',
'priority': 10, 'id': 1}, {'group': 'MyGroup2',
'pattern': 'FIXME', 'priority': 10, 'id': 2}] >
:let m = getmatches()
:call clearmatches()
:echo getmatches()
< [] >
:call setmatches(m)
:echo getmatches()
< [{'group': 'MyGroup1', 'pattern': 'TODO',
'priority': 10, 'id': 1}, {'group': 'MyGroup2',
'pattern': 'FIXME', 'priority': 10, 'id': 2}] >
:unlet m
<
getmousepos() *getmousepos()*
Returns a |Dictionary| with the last known position of the
mouse. This can be used in a mapping for a mouse click or in
a filter of a popup window. The items are:
screenrow screen row
screencol screen column
winid Window ID of the click
winrow row inside "winid"
wincol column inside "winid"
line text line inside "winid"
column text column inside "winid"
All numbers are 1-based.
If not over a window, e.g. when in the command line, then only
"screenrow" and "screencol" are valid, the others are zero.
When on the status line below a window or the vertical
separator right of a window, the "line" and "column" values
are zero.
When the position is after the text then "column" is the
length of the text in bytes plus one.
If the mouse is over a popup window then that window is used.
When using |getchar()| the Vim variables |v:mouse_lnum|,
|v:mouse_col| and |v:mouse_winid| also provide these values.
getmouseshape() *getmouseshape()*
Returns the name of the currently showing mouse pointer.
When the |+mouseshape| feature is not supported or the shape
is unknown an empty string is returned.
This function is mainly intended for testing.
*getpid()*
getpid() Return a Number which is the process ID of the Vim process.
On Unix and MS-Windows this is a unique number, until Vim
exits.
*getpos()*
getpos({expr}) Get the position for String {expr}. For possible values of
{expr} see |line()|. For getting the cursor position see
|getcurpos()|.
The result is a |List| with four numbers:
[bufnum, lnum, col, off]
"bufnum" is zero, unless a mark like '0 or 'A is used, then it
is the buffer number of the mark.
"lnum" and "col" are the position in the buffer. The first
column is 1.
The "off" number is zero, unless 'virtualedit' is used. Then
it is the offset in screen columns from the start of the
character. E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last
character.
Note that for '< and '> Visual mode matters: when it is "V"
(visual line mode) the column of '< is zero and the column of
'> is a large number equal to |v:maxcol|.
The column number in the returned List is the byte position
within the line. To get the character position in the line,
use |getcharpos()|.
A very large column number equal to |v:maxcol| can be returned,
in which case it means "after the end of the line".
If {expr} is invalid, returns a list with all zeros.
This can be used to save and restore the position of a mark: >
let save_a_mark = getpos("'a")
...
call setpos("'a", save_a_mark)
< Also see |getcharpos()|, |getcurpos()| and |setpos()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetMark()->getpos()
getqflist([{what}]) *getqflist()*
Returns a |List| with all the current quickfix errors. Each
list item is a dictionary with these entries:
bufnr number of buffer that has the file name, use
bufname() to get the name
module module name
lnum line number in the buffer (first line is 1)
end_lnum
end of line number if the item is multiline
col column number (first column is 1)
end_col end of column number if the item has range
vcol |TRUE|: "col" is visual column
|FALSE|: "col" is byte index
nr error number
pattern search pattern used to locate the error
text description of the error
type type of the error, 'E', '1', etc.
valid |TRUE|: recognized error message
When there is no error list or it's empty, an empty list is
returned. Quickfix list entries with a non-existing buffer
number are returned with "bufnr" set to zero (Note: some
functions accept buffer number zero for the alternate buffer,
you may need to explicitly check for zero).
Useful application: Find pattern matches in multiple files and
do something with them: >
:vimgrep /theword/jg *.c
:for d in getqflist()
: echo bufname(d.bufnr) ':' d.lnum '=' d.text
:endfor
<
If the optional {what} dictionary argument is supplied, then
returns only the items listed in {what} as a dictionary. The
following string items are supported in {what}:
changedtick get the total number of changes made
to the list |quickfix-changedtick|
context get the |quickfix-context|
efm errorformat to use when parsing "lines". If
not present, then the 'errorformat' option
value is used.
id get information for the quickfix list with
|quickfix-ID|; zero means the id for the
current list or the list specified by "nr"
idx get information for the quickfix entry at this
index in the list specified by 'id' or 'nr'.
If set to zero, then uses the current entry.
See |quickfix-index|
items quickfix list entries
lines parse a list of lines using 'efm' and return
the resulting entries. Only a |List| type is
accepted. The current quickfix list is not
modified. See |quickfix-parse|.
nr get information for this quickfix list; zero
means the current quickfix list and "$" means
the last quickfix list
qfbufnr number of the buffer displayed in the quickfix
window. Returns 0 if the quickfix buffer is
not present. See |quickfix-buffer|.
size number of entries in the quickfix list
title get the list title |quickfix-title|
winid get the quickfix |window-ID|
all all of the above quickfix properties
Non-string items in {what} are ignored. To get the value of a
particular item, set it to zero.
If "nr" is not present then the current quickfix list is used.
If both "nr" and a non-zero "id" are specified, then the list
specified by "id" is used.
To get the number of lists in the quickfix stack, set "nr" to
"$" in {what}. The "nr" value in the returned dictionary
contains the quickfix stack size.
When "lines" is specified, all the other items except "efm"
are ignored. The returned dictionary contains the entry
"items" with the list of entries.
The returned dictionary contains the following entries:
changedtick total number of changes made to the
list |quickfix-changedtick|
context quickfix list context. See |quickfix-context|
If not present, set to "".
id quickfix list ID |quickfix-ID|. If not
present, set to 0.
idx index of the quickfix entry in the list. If not
present, set to 0.
items quickfix list entries. If not present, set to
an empty list.
nr quickfix list number. If not present, set to 0
qfbufnr number of the buffer displayed in the quickfix
window. If not present, set to 0.
size number of entries in the quickfix list. If not
present, set to 0.
title quickfix list title text. If not present, set
to "".
winid quickfix |window-ID|. If not present, set to 0
Examples (See also |getqflist-examples|): >
:echo getqflist({'all': 1})
:echo getqflist({'nr': 2, 'title': 1})
:echo getqflist({'lines' : ["F1:10:L10"]})
<
getreg([{regname} [, 1 [, {list}]]]) *getreg()*
The result is a String, which is the contents of register
{regname}. Example: >
:let cliptext = getreg('*')
< When register {regname} was not set the result is an empty
string.
The {regname} argument must be a string. *E1162*
getreg('=') returns the last evaluated value of the expression
register. (For use in maps.)
getreg('=', 1) returns the expression itself, so that it can
be restored with |setreg()|. For other registers the extra
argument is ignored, thus you can always give it.
If {list} is present and |TRUE|, the result type is changed
to |List|. Each list item is one text line. Use it if you care
about zero bytes possibly present inside register: without
third argument both NLs and zero bytes are represented as NLs
(see |NL-used-for-Nul|).
When the register was not set an empty list is returned.
If {regname} is "", the unnamed register '"' is used.
If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used.
In |Vim9-script| {regname} must be one character.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetRegname()->getreg()
getreginfo([{regname}]) *getreginfo()*
Returns detailed information about register {regname} as a
Dictionary with the following entries:
regcontents List of lines contained in register
{regname}, like
|getreg|({regname}, 1, 1).
regtype the type of register {regname}, as in
|getregtype()|.
isunnamed Boolean flag, v:true if this register
is currently pointed to by the unnamed
register.
points_to for the unnamed register, gives the
single letter name of the register
currently pointed to (see |quotequote|).
For example, after deleting a line
with `dd`, this field will be "1",
which is the register that got the
deleted text.
The {regname} argument is a string. If {regname} is invalid
or not set, an empty Dictionary will be returned.
If {regname} is "" or "@", the unnamed register '"' is used.
If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used.
The returned Dictionary can be passed to |setreg()|.
In |Vim9-script| {regname} must be one character.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetRegname()->getreginfo()
getregtype([{regname}]) *getregtype()*
The result is a String, which is type of register {regname}.
The value will be one of:
"v" for |characterwise| text
"V" for |linewise| text
"<CTRL-V>{width}" for |blockwise-visual| text
"" for an empty or unknown register
<CTRL-V> is one character with value 0x16.
The {regname} argument is a string. If {regname} is "", the
unnamed register '"' is used. If {regname} is not specified,
|v:register| is used.
In |Vim9-script| {regname} must be one character.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetRegname()->getregtype()
getscriptinfo([{opts}) *getscriptinfo()*
Returns a |List| with information about all the sourced Vim
scripts in the order they were sourced, like what
`:scriptnames` shows.
The optional Dict argument {opts} supports the following
optional items:
name Script name match pattern. If specified,
and "sid" is not specified, information about
scripts with name that match the pattern
"name" are returned.
sid Script ID |<SID>|. If specified, only
information about the script with ID "sid" is
returned and "name" is ignored.
Each item in the returned List is a |Dict| with the following
items:
autoload Set to TRUE for a script that was used with
`import autoload` but was not actually sourced
yet (see |import-autoload|).
functions List of script-local function names defined in
the script. Present only when a particular
script is specified using the "sid" item in
{opts}.
name Vim script file name.
sid Script ID |<SID>|.
sourced Script ID of the actually sourced script that
this script name links to, if any, otherwise
zero
variables A dictionary with the script-local variables.
Present only when a particular script is
specified using the "sid" item in {opts}.
Note that this is a copy, the value of
script-local variables cannot be changed using
this dictionary.
version Vimscript version (|scriptversion|)
Examples: >
:echo getscriptinfo({'name': 'myscript'})
:echo getscriptinfo({'sid': 15}).variables
<
gettabinfo([{tabnr}]) *gettabinfo()*
If {tabnr} is not specified, then information about all the
tab pages is returned as a |List|. Each List item is a
|Dictionary|. Otherwise, {tabnr} specifies the tab page
number and information about that one is returned. If the tab
page does not exist an empty List is returned.
Each List item is a |Dictionary| with the following entries:
tabnr tab page number.
variables a reference to the dictionary with
tabpage-local variables
windows List of |window-ID|s in the tab page.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetTabnr()->gettabinfo()
gettabvar({tabnr}, {varname} [, {def}]) *gettabvar()*
Get the value of a tab-local variable {varname} in tab page
{tabnr}. |t:var|
Tabs are numbered starting with one.
The {varname} argument is a string. When {varname} is empty a
dictionary with all tab-local variables is returned.
Note that the name without "t:" must be used.
When the tab or variable doesn't exist {def} or an empty
string is returned, there is no error message.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetTabnr()->gettabvar(varname)
gettabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname} [, {def}]) *gettabwinvar()*
Get the value of window-local variable {varname} in window
{winnr} in tab page {tabnr}.
The {varname} argument is a string. When {varname} is empty a
dictionary with all window-local variables is returned.
When {varname} is equal to "&" get the values of all
window-local options in a |Dictionary|.
Otherwise, when {varname} starts with "&" get the value of a
window-local option.
Note that {varname} must be the name without "w:".
Tabs are numbered starting with one. For the current tabpage
use |getwinvar()|.
{winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
When {winnr} is zero the current window is used.
This also works for a global option, buffer-local option and
window-local option, but it doesn't work for a global variable
or buffer-local variable.
When the tab, window or variable doesn't exist {def} or an
empty string is returned, there is no error message.
Examples: >
:let list_is_on = gettabwinvar(1, 2, '&list')
:echo "myvar = " .. gettabwinvar(3, 1, 'myvar')
<
To obtain all window-local variables use: >
gettabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, '&')
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetTabnr()->gettabwinvar(winnr, varname)
gettagstack([{winnr}]) *gettagstack()*
The result is a Dict, which is the tag stack of window {winnr}.
{winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
When {winnr} is not specified, the current window is used.
When window {winnr} doesn't exist, an empty Dict is returned.
The returned dictionary contains the following entries:
curidx Current index in the stack. When at
top of the stack, set to (length + 1).
Index of bottom of the stack is 1.
items List of items in the stack. Each item
is a dictionary containing the
entries described below.
length Number of entries in the stack.
Each item in the stack is a dictionary with the following
entries:
bufnr buffer number of the current jump
from cursor position before the tag jump.
See |getpos()| for the format of the
returned list.
matchnr current matching tag number. Used when
multiple matching tags are found for a
name.
tagname name of the tag
See |tagstack| for more information about the tag stack.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWinnr()->gettagstack()
gettext({text}) *gettext()*
Translate String {text} if possible.
This is mainly for use in the distributed Vim scripts. When
generating message translations the {text} is extracted by
xgettext, the translator can add the translated message in the
.po file and Vim will lookup the translation when gettext() is
called.
For {text} double quoted strings are preferred, because
xgettext does not understand escaping in single quoted
strings.
getwininfo([{winid}]) *getwininfo()*
Returns information about windows as a |List| with Dictionaries.
If {winid} is given Information about the window with that ID
is returned, as a |List| with one item. If the window does not
exist the result is an empty list.
Without {winid} information about all the windows in all the
tab pages is returned.
Each List item is a |Dictionary| with the following entries:
botline last complete displayed buffer line
bufnr number of buffer in the window
height window height (excluding winbar)
loclist 1 if showing a location list
{only with the +quickfix feature}
quickfix 1 if quickfix or location list window
{only with the +quickfix feature}
terminal 1 if a terminal window
{only with the +terminal feature}
tabnr tab page number
topline first displayed buffer line
variables a reference to the dictionary with
window-local variables
width window width
winbar 1 if the window has a toolbar, 0
otherwise
wincol leftmost screen column of the window;
"col" from |win_screenpos()|
textoff number of columns occupied by any
'foldcolumn', 'signcolumn' and line
number in front of the text
winid |window-ID|
winnr window number
winrow topmost screen line of the window;
"row" from |win_screenpos()|
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWinnr()->getwininfo()
getwinpos([{timeout}]) *getwinpos()*
The result is a |List| with two numbers, the result of
|getwinposx()| and |getwinposy()| combined:
[x-pos, y-pos]
{timeout} can be used to specify how long to wait in msec for
a response from the terminal. When omitted 100 msec is used.
Use a longer time for a remote terminal.
When using a value less than 10 and no response is received
within that time, a previously reported position is returned,
if available. This can be used to poll for the position and
do some work in the meantime: >
while 1
let res = getwinpos(1)
if res[0] >= 0
break
endif
" Do some work here
endwhile
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetTimeout()->getwinpos()
<
*getwinposx()*
getwinposx() The result is a Number, which is the X coordinate in pixels of
the left hand side of the GUI Vim window. Also works for an
xterm (uses a timeout of 100 msec).
The result will be -1 if the information is not available.
The value can be used with `:winpos`.
*getwinposy()*
getwinposy() The result is a Number, which is the Y coordinate in pixels of
the top of the GUI Vim window. Also works for an xterm (uses
a timeout of 100 msec).
The result will be -1 if the information is not available.
The value can be used with `:winpos`.
getwinvar({winnr}, {varname} [, {def}]) *getwinvar()*
Like |gettabwinvar()| for the current tabpage.
Examples: >
:let list_is_on = getwinvar(2, '&list')
:echo "myvar = " .. getwinvar(1, 'myvar')
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWinnr()->getwinvar(varname)
<
glob({expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list} [, {alllinks}]]]) *glob()*
Expand the file wildcards in {expr}. See |wildcards| for the
use of special characters.
Unless the optional {nosuf} argument is given and is |TRUE|,
the 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' options apply: Names matching
one of the patterns in 'wildignore' will be skipped and
'suffixes' affect the ordering of matches.
'wildignorecase' always applies.
When {list} is present and it is |TRUE| the result is a |List|
with all matching files. The advantage of using a List is,
you also get filenames containing newlines correctly.
Otherwise the result is a String and when there are several
matches, they are separated by <NL> characters.
If the expansion fails, the result is an empty String or List.
You can also use |readdir()| if you need to do complicated
things, such as limiting the number of matches.
A name for a non-existing file is not included. A symbolic
link is only included if it points to an existing file.
However, when the {alllinks} argument is present and it is
|TRUE| then all symbolic links are included.
For most systems backticks can be used to get files names from
any external command. Example: >
:let tagfiles = glob("`find . -name tags -print`")
:let &tags = substitute(tagfiles, "\n", ",", "g")
< The result of the program inside the backticks should be one
item per line. Spaces inside an item are allowed.
See |expand()| for expanding special Vim variables. See
|system()| for getting the raw output of an external command.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetExpr()->glob()
glob2regpat({string}) *glob2regpat()*
Convert a file pattern, as used by glob(), into a search
pattern. The result can be used to match with a string that
is a file name. E.g. >
if filename =~ glob2regpat('Make*.mak')
< This is equivalent to: >
if filename =~ '^Make.*\.mak$'
< When {string} is an empty string the result is "^$", match an
empty string.
Note that the result depends on the system. On MS-Windows
a backslash usually means a path separator.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetExpr()->glob2regpat()
< *globpath()*
globpath({path}, {expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list} [, {alllinks}]]])
Perform glob() for String {expr} on all directories in {path}
and concatenate the results. Example: >
:echo globpath(&rtp, "syntax/c.vim")
<
{path} is a comma-separated list of directory names. Each
directory name is prepended to {expr} and expanded like with
|glob()|. A path separator is inserted when needed.
To add a comma inside a directory name escape it with a
backslash. Note that on MS-Windows a directory may have a
trailing backslash, remove it if you put a comma after it.
If the expansion fails for one of the directories, there is no
error message.
Unless the optional {nosuf} argument is given and is |TRUE|,
the 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' options apply: Names matching
one of the patterns in 'wildignore' will be skipped and
'suffixes' affect the ordering of matches.
When {list} is present and it is |TRUE| the result is a |List|
with all matching files. The advantage of using a List is, you
also get filenames containing newlines correctly. Otherwise
the result is a String and when there are several matches,
they are separated by <NL> characters. Example: >
:echo globpath(&rtp, "syntax/c.vim", 0, 1)
<
{alllinks} is used as with |glob()|.
The "**" item can be used to search in a directory tree.
For example, to find all "README.txt" files in the directories
in 'runtimepath' and below: >
:echo globpath(&rtp, "**/README.txt")
< Upwards search and limiting the depth of "**" is not
supported, thus using 'path' will not always work properly.
Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
second argument: >
GetExpr()->globpath(&rtp)
<
*has()*
has({feature} [, {check}])
When {check} is omitted or is zero: The result is a Number,
which is 1 if the feature {feature} is supported, zero
otherwise. The {feature} argument is a string, case is
ignored. See |feature-list| below.
When {check} is present and not zero: The result is a Number,
which is 1 if the feature {feature} could ever be supported,
zero otherwise. This is useful to check for a typo in
{feature} and to detect dead code. Keep in mind that an older
Vim version will not know about a feature added later and
features that have been abandoned will not be known by the
current Vim version.
Also see |exists()| and |exists_compiled()|.
Note that to skip code that has a syntax error when the
feature is not available, Vim may skip the rest of the line
and miss a following `endif`. Therefore put the `endif` on a
separate line: >
if has('feature')
let x = this->breaks->without->the->feature
endif
< If the `endif` would be moved to the second line as "| endif" it
would not be found.
has_key({dict}, {key}) *has_key()*
The result is a Number, which is TRUE if |Dictionary| {dict}
has an entry with key {key}. FALSE otherwise.
The {key} argument is a string. In |Vim9| script a number is
also accepted (and converted to a string) but no other types.
In legacy script the usual automatic conversion to string is
done.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
mydict->has_key(key)
haslocaldir([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]]) *haslocaldir()*
The result is a Number:
1 when the window has set a local directory via |:lcd|
2 when the tab-page has set a local directory via |:tcd|
0 otherwise.
Without arguments use the current window.
With {winnr} use this window in the current tab page.
With {winnr} and {tabnr} use the window in the specified tab
page.
{winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
If {winnr} is -1 it is ignored and only the tabpage is used.
Return 0 if the arguments are invalid.
Examples: >
if haslocaldir() == 1
" window local directory case
elseif haslocaldir() == 2
" tab-local directory case
else
" global directory case
endif
" current window
:echo haslocaldir()
:echo haslocaldir(0)
:echo haslocaldir(0, 0)
" window n in current tab page
:echo haslocaldir(n)
:echo haslocaldir(n, 0)
" window n in tab page m
:echo haslocaldir(n, m)
" tab page m
:echo haslocaldir(-1, m)
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWinnr()->haslocaldir()
hasmapto({what} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]]) *hasmapto()*
The result is a Number, which is TRUE if there is a mapping
that contains {what} in somewhere in the rhs (what it is
mapped to) and this mapping exists in one of the modes
indicated by {mode}.
The arguments {what} and {mode} are strings.
When {abbr} is there and it is |TRUE| use abbreviations
instead of mappings. Don't forget to specify Insert and/or
Command-line mode.
Both the global mappings and the mappings local to the current
buffer are checked for a match.
If no matching mapping is found FALSE is returned.
The following characters are recognized in {mode}:
n Normal mode
v Visual and Select mode
x Visual mode
s Select mode
o Operator-pending mode
i Insert mode
l Language-Argument ("r", "f", "t", etc.)
c Command-line mode
When {mode} is omitted, "nvo" is used.
This function is useful to check if a mapping already exists
to a function in a Vim script. Example: >
:if !hasmapto('\ABCdoit')
: map <Leader>d \ABCdoit
:endif
< This installs the mapping to "\ABCdoit" only if there isn't
already a mapping to "\ABCdoit".
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetRHS()->hasmapto()
histadd({history}, {item}) *histadd()*
Add the String {item} to the history {history} which can be
one of: *hist-names*
"cmd" or ":" command line history
"search" or "/" search pattern history
"expr" or "=" typed expression history
"input" or "@" input line history
"debug" or ">" debug command history
empty the current or last used history
The {history} string does not need to be the whole name, one
character is sufficient.
If {item} does already exist in the history, it will be
shifted to become the newest entry.
The result is a Number: TRUE if the operation was successful,
otherwise FALSE is returned.
Example: >
:call histadd("input", strftime("%Y %b %d"))
:let date=input("Enter date: ")
< This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
second argument: >
GetHistory()->histadd('search')
histdel({history} [, {item}]) *histdel()*
Clear {history}, i.e. delete all its entries. See |hist-names|
for the possible values of {history}.
If the parameter {item} evaluates to a String, it is used as a
regular expression. All entries matching that expression will
be removed from the history (if there are any).
Upper/lowercase must match, unless "\c" is used |/\c|.
If {item} evaluates to a Number, it will be interpreted as
an index, see |:history-indexing|. The respective entry will
be removed if it exists.
The result is TRUE for a successful operation, otherwise FALSE
is returned.
Examples:
Clear expression register history: >
:call histdel("expr")
<
Remove all entries starting with "*" from the search history: >
:call histdel("/", '^\*')
<
The following three are equivalent: >
:call histdel("search", histnr("search"))
:call histdel("search", -1)
:call histdel("search", '^' .. histget("search", -1) .. '$')
<
To delete the last search pattern and use the last-but-one for
the "n" command and 'hlsearch': >
:call histdel("search", -1)
:let @/ = histget("search", -1)
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetHistory()->histdel()
histget({history} [, {index}]) *histget()*
The result is a String, the entry with Number {index} from
{history}. See |hist-names| for the possible values of
{history}, and |:history-indexing| for {index}. If there is
no such entry, an empty String is returned. When {index} is
omitted, the most recent item from the history is used.
Examples:
Redo the second last search from history. >
:execute '/' .. histget("search", -2)
< Define an Ex command ":H {num}" that supports re-execution of
the {num}th entry from the output of |:history|. >
:command -nargs=1 H execute histget("cmd", 0+<args>)
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetHistory()->histget()
histnr({history}) *histnr()*
The result is the Number of the current entry in {history}.
See |hist-names| for the possible values of {history}.
If an error occurred, -1 is returned.
Example: >
:let inp_index = histnr("expr")
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetHistory()->histnr()
<
hlexists({name}) *hlexists()*
The result is a Number, which is TRUE if a highlight group
called {name} exists. This is when the group has been
defined in some way. Not necessarily when highlighting has
been defined for it, it may also have been used for a syntax
item.
*highlight_exists()*
Obsolete name: highlight_exists().
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetName()->hlexists()
<
hlget([{name} [, {resolve}]]) *hlget()*
Returns a List of all the highlight group attributes. If the
optional {name} is specified, then returns a List with only
the attributes of the specified highlight group. Returns an
empty List if the highlight group {name} is not present.
If the optional {resolve} argument is set to v:true and the
highlight group {name} is linked to another group, then the
link is resolved recursively and the attributes of the
resolved highlight group are returned.
Each entry in the returned List is a Dictionary with the
following items:
cleared boolean flag, set to v:true if the highlight
group attributes are cleared or not yet
specified. See |highlight-clear|.
cterm cterm attributes. See |highlight-cterm|.
ctermbg cterm background color.
See |highlight-ctermbg|.
ctermfg cterm foreground color.
See |highlight-ctermfg|.
ctermul cterm underline color. See |highlight-ctermul|.
default boolean flag, set to v:true if the highlight
group link is a default link. See
|highlight-default|.
font highlight group font. See |highlight-font|.
gui gui attributes. See |highlight-gui|.
guibg gui background color. See |highlight-guibg|.
guifg gui foreground color. See |highlight-guifg|.
guisp gui special color. See |highlight-guisp|.
id highlight group ID.
linksto linked highlight group name.
See |:highlight-link|.
name highlight group name. See |group-name|.
start start terminal keycode. See |highlight-start|.
stop stop terminal keycode. See |highlight-stop|.
term term attributes. See |highlight-term|.
The 'term', 'cterm' and 'gui' items in the above Dictionary
have a dictionary value with the following optional boolean
items: 'bold', 'standout', 'underline', 'undercurl', 'italic',
'reverse', 'inverse' and 'strikethrough'.
Example(s): >
:echo hlget()
:echo hlget('ModeMsg')
:echo hlget('Number', v:true)
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetName()->hlget()
<
hlset({list}) *hlset()*
Creates or modifies the attributes of a List of highlight
groups. Each item in {list} is a dictionary containing the
attributes of a highlight group. See |hlget()| for the list of
supported items in this dictionary.
In addition to the items described in |hlget()|, the following
additional items are supported in the dictionary:
force boolean flag to force the creation of
a link for an existing highlight group
with attributes.
The highlight group is identified using the 'name' item and
the 'id' item (if supplied) is ignored. If a highlight group
with a specified name doesn't exist, then it is created.
Otherwise the attributes of an existing highlight group are
modified.
If an empty dictionary value is used for the 'term' or 'cterm'
or 'gui' entries, then the corresponding attributes are
cleared. If the 'cleared' item is set to v:true, then all the
attributes of the highlight group are cleared.
The 'linksto' item can be used to link a highlight group to
another highlight group. See |:highlight-link|.
Returns zero for success, -1 for failure.
Example(s): >
" add bold attribute to the Visual highlight group
:call hlset([#{name: 'Visual',
\ term: #{reverse: 1 , bold: 1}}])
:call hlset([#{name: 'Type', guifg: 'DarkGreen'}])
:let l = hlget()
:call hlset(l)
" clear the Search highlight group
:call hlset([#{name: 'Search', cleared: v:true}])
" clear the 'term' attributes for a highlight group
:call hlset([#{name: 'Title', term: {}}])
" create the MyHlg group linking it to DiffAdd
:call hlset([#{name: 'MyHlg', linksto: 'DiffAdd'}])
" remove the MyHlg group link
:call hlset([#{name: 'MyHlg', linksto: 'NONE'}])
" clear the attributes and a link
:call hlset([#{name: 'MyHlg', cleared: v:true,
\ linksto: 'NONE'}])
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetAttrList()->hlset()
<
*hlID()*
hlID({name}) The result is a Number, which is the ID of the highlight group
with name {name}. When the highlight group doesn't exist,
zero is returned.
This can be used to retrieve information about the highlight
group. For example, to get the background color of the
"Comment" group: >
:echo synIDattr(synIDtrans(hlID("Comment")), "bg")
< *highlightID()*
Obsolete name: highlightID().
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetName()->hlID()
hostname() *hostname()*
The result is a String, which is the name of the machine on
which Vim is currently running. Machine names greater than
256 characters long are truncated.
iconv({string}, {from}, {to}) *iconv()*
The result is a String, which is the text {string} converted
from encoding {from} to encoding {to}.
When the conversion completely fails an empty string is
returned. When some characters could not be converted they
are replaced with "?".
The encoding names are whatever the iconv() library function
can accept, see ":!man 3 iconv".
Most conversions require Vim to be compiled with the |+iconv|
feature. Otherwise only UTF-8 to latin1 conversion and back
can be done.
This can be used to display messages with special characters,
no matter what 'encoding' is set to. Write the message in
UTF-8 and use: >
echo iconv(utf8_str, "utf-8", &enc)
< Note that Vim uses UTF-8 for all Unicode encodings, conversion
from/to UCS-2 is automatically changed to use UTF-8. You
cannot use UCS-2 in a string anyway, because of the NUL bytes.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetText()->iconv('latin1', 'utf-8')
<
*indent()*
indent({lnum}) The result is a Number, which is indent of line {lnum} in the
current buffer. The indent is counted in spaces, the value
of 'tabstop' is relevant. {lnum} is used just like in
|getline()|.
When {lnum} is invalid -1 is returned. In |Vim9| script an
error is given.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetLnum()->indent()
index({object}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]]) *index()*
Find {expr} in {object} and return its index. See
|indexof()| for using a lambda to select the item.
If {object} is a |List| return the lowest index where the item
has a value equal to {expr}. There is no automatic
conversion, so the String "4" is different from the Number 4.
And the number 4 is different from the Float 4.0. The value
of 'ignorecase' is not used here, case matters as indicated by
the {ic} argument.
If {object} is |Blob| return the lowest index where the byte
value is equal to {expr}.
If {start} is given then start looking at the item with index
{start} (may be negative for an item relative to the end).
When {ic} is given and it is |TRUE|, ignore case. Otherwise
case must match.
-1 is returned when {expr} is not found in {object}.
Example: >
:let idx = index(words, "the")
:if index(numbers, 123) >= 0
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetObject()->index(what)
indexof({object}, {expr} [, {opts}]) *indexof()*
Returns the index of an item in {object} where {expr} is
v:true. {object} must be a |List| or a |Blob|.
If {object} is a |List|, evaluate {expr} for each item in the
List until the expression is v:true and return the index of
this item.
If {object} is a |Blob| evaluate {expr} for each byte in the
Blob until the expression is v:true and return the index of
this byte.
{expr} must be a |string| or |Funcref|.
If {expr} is a |string|: If {object} is a |List|, inside
{expr} |v:key| has the index of the current List item and
|v:val| has the value of the item. If {object} is a |Blob|,
inside {expr} |v:key| has the index of the current byte and
|v:val| has the byte value.
If {expr} is a |Funcref| it must take two arguments:
1. the key or the index of the current item.
2. the value of the current item.
The function must return |TRUE| if the item is found and the
search should stop.
The optional argument {opts} is a Dict and supports the
following items:
startidx start evaluating {expr} at the item with this
index; may be negative for an item relative to
the end
Returns -1 when {expr} evaluates to v:false for all the items.
Example: >
:let l = [#{n: 10}, #{n: 20}, #{n: 30}]
:echo indexof(l, "v:val.n == 20")
:echo indexof(l, {i, v -> v.n == 30})
:echo indexof(l, "v:val.n == 20", #{startidx: 1})
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
mylist->indexof(expr)
input({prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]]) *input()*
The result is a String, which is whatever the user typed on
the command-line. The {prompt} argument is either a prompt
string, or a blank string (for no prompt). A '\n' can be used
in the prompt to start a new line.
The highlighting set with |:echohl| is used for the prompt.
The input is entered just like a command-line, with the same
editing commands and mappings. There is a separate history
for lines typed for input().
Example: >
:if input("Coffee or beer? ") == "beer"
: echo "Cheers!"
:endif
<
If the optional {text} argument is present and not empty, this
is used for the default reply, as if the user typed this.
Example: >
:let color = input("Color? ", "white")
< The optional {completion} argument specifies the type of
completion supported for the input. Without it completion is
not performed. The supported completion types are the same as
that can be supplied to a user-defined command using the
"-complete=" argument. Refer to |:command-completion| for
more information. Example: >
let fname = input("File: ", "", "file")
<
NOTE: This function must not be used in a startup file, for
the versions that only run in GUI mode (e.g., the Win32 GUI).
Note: When input() is called from within a mapping it will
consume remaining characters from that mapping, because a
mapping is handled like the characters were typed.
Use |inputsave()| before input() and |inputrestore()|
after input() to avoid that. Another solution is to avoid
that further characters follow in the mapping, e.g., by using
|:execute| or |:normal|.
Example with a mapping: >
:nmap \x :call GetFoo()<CR>:exe "/" .. Foo<CR>
:function GetFoo()
: call inputsave()
: let g:Foo = input("enter search pattern: ")
: call inputrestore()
:endfunction
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetPrompt()->input()
inputdialog({prompt} [, {text} [, {cancelreturn}]]) *inputdialog()*
Like |input()|, but when the GUI is running and text dialogs
are supported, a dialog window pops up to input the text.
Example: >
:let n = inputdialog("value for shiftwidth", shiftwidth())
:if n != ""
: let &sw = n
:endif
< When the dialog is cancelled {cancelreturn} is returned. When
omitted an empty string is returned.
Hitting <Enter> works like pressing the OK button. Hitting
<Esc> works like pressing the Cancel button.
NOTE: Command-line completion is not supported.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetPrompt()->inputdialog()
inputlist({textlist}) *inputlist()*
{textlist} must be a |List| of strings. This |List| is
displayed, one string per line. The user will be prompted to
enter a number, which is returned.
The user can also select an item by clicking on it with the
mouse, if the mouse is enabled in the command line ('mouse' is
"a" or includes "c"). For the first string 0 is returned.
When clicking above the first item a negative number is
returned. When clicking on the prompt one more than the
length of {textlist} is returned.
Make sure {textlist} has less than 'lines' entries, otherwise
it won't work. It's a good idea to put the entry number at
the start of the string. And put a prompt in the first item.
Example: >
let color = inputlist(['Select color:', '1. red',
\ '2. green', '3. blue'])
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetChoices()->inputlist()
inputrestore() *inputrestore()*
Restore typeahead that was saved with a previous |inputsave()|.
Should be called the same number of times inputsave() is
called. Calling it more often is harmless though.
Returns TRUE when there is nothing to restore, FALSE otherwise.
inputsave() *inputsave()*
Preserve typeahead (also from mappings) and clear it, so that
a following prompt gets input from the user. Should be
followed by a matching inputrestore() after the prompt. Can
be used several times, in which case there must be just as
many inputrestore() calls.
Returns TRUE when out of memory, FALSE otherwise.
inputsecret({prompt} [, {text}]) *inputsecret()*
This function acts much like the |input()| function with but
two exceptions:
a) the user's response will be displayed as a sequence of
asterisks ("*") thereby keeping the entry secret, and
b) the user's response will not be recorded on the input
|history| stack.
The result is a String, which is whatever the user actually
typed on the command-line in response to the issued prompt.
NOTE: Command-line completion is not supported.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetPrompt()->inputsecret()
insert({object}, {item} [, {idx}]) *insert()*
When {object} is a |List| or a |Blob| insert {item} at the start
of it.
If {idx} is specified insert {item} before the item with index
{idx}. If {idx} is zero it goes before the first item, just
like omitting {idx}. A negative {idx} is also possible, see
|list-index|. -1 inserts just before the last item.
Returns the resulting |List| or |Blob|. Examples: >
:let mylist = insert([2, 3, 5], 1)
:call insert(mylist, 4, -1)
:call insert(mylist, 6, len(mylist))
< The last example can be done simpler with |add()|.
Note that when {item} is a |List| it is inserted as a single
item. Use |extend()| to concatenate |Lists|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
mylist->insert(item)
interrupt() *interrupt()*
Interrupt script execution. It works more or less like the
user typing CTRL-C, most commands won't execute and control
returns to the user. This is useful to abort execution
from lower down, e.g. in an autocommand. Example: >
:function s:check_typoname(file)
: if fnamemodify(a:file, ':t') == '['
: echomsg 'Maybe typo'
: call interrupt()
: endif
:endfunction
:au BufWritePre * call s:check_typoname(expand('<amatch>'))
invert({expr}) *invert()*
Bitwise invert. The argument is converted to a number. A
List, Dict or Float argument causes an error. Example: >
:let bits = invert(bits)
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
:let bits = bits->invert()
isabsolutepath({path}) *isabsolutepath()*
The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| when {path} is an
absolute path.
On Unix, a path is considered absolute when it starts with '/'.
On MS-Windows, it is considered absolute when it starts with an
optional drive prefix and is followed by a '\' or '/'. UNC paths
are always absolute.
Example: >
echo isabsolutepath('/usr/share/') " 1
echo isabsolutepath('./foobar') " 0
echo isabsolutepath('C:\Windows') " 1
echo isabsolutepath('foobar') " 0
echo isabsolutepath('\\remote\file') " 1
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetName()->isabsolutepath()
isdirectory({directory}) *isdirectory()*
The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| when a directory
with the name {directory} exists. If {directory} doesn't
exist, or isn't a directory, the result is |FALSE|. {directory}
is any expression, which is used as a String.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetName()->isdirectory()
isinf({expr}) *isinf()*
Return 1 if {expr} is a positive infinity, or -1 a negative
infinity, otherwise 0. >
:echo isinf(1.0 / 0.0)
< 1 >
:echo isinf(-1.0 / 0.0)
< -1
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Compute()->isinf()
islocked({expr}) *islocked()* *E786*
The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| when {expr} is the
name of a locked variable.
The string argument {expr} must be the name of a variable,
|List| item or |Dictionary| entry, not the variable itself!
Example: >
:let alist = [0, ['a', 'b'], 2, 3]
:lockvar 1 alist
:echo islocked('alist') " 1
:echo islocked('alist[1]') " 0
< When {expr} is a variable that does not exist -1 is returned.
If {expr} uses a range, list or dict index that is out of
range or does not exist you get an error message. Use
|exists()| to check for existence.
In Vim9 script it does not work for local function variables.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetName()->islocked()
isnan({expr}) *isnan()*
Return |TRUE| if {expr} is a float with value NaN. >
echo isnan(0.0 / 0.0)
< 1
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Compute()->isnan()
items({dict}) *items()*
Return a |List| with all the key-value pairs of {dict}. Each
|List| item is a list with two items: the key of a {dict}
entry and the value of this entry. The |List| is in arbitrary
order. Also see |keys()| and |values()|.
Example: >
for [key, value] in items(mydict)
echo key .. ': ' .. value
endfor
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
mydict->items()
job_ functions are documented here: |job-functions-details|
join({list} [, {sep}]) *join()*
Join the items in {list} together into one String.
When {sep} is specified it is put in between the items. If
{sep} is omitted a single space is used.
Note that {sep} is not added at the end. You might want to
add it there too: >
let lines = join(mylist, "\n") .. "\n"
< String items are used as-is. |Lists| and |Dictionaries| are
converted into a string like with |string()|.
The opposite function is |split()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
mylist->join()
js_decode({string}) *js_decode()*
This is similar to |json_decode()| with these differences:
- Object key names do not have to be in quotes.
- Strings can be in single quotes.
- Empty items in an array (between two commas) are allowed and
result in v:none items.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
ReadObject()->js_decode()
js_encode({expr}) *js_encode()*
This is similar to |json_encode()| with these differences:
- Object key names are not in quotes.
- v:none items in an array result in an empty item between
commas.
For example, the Vim object:
[1,v:none,{"one":1},v:none] ~
Will be encoded as:
[1,,{one:1},,] ~
While json_encode() would produce:
[1,null,{"one":1},null] ~
This encoding is valid for JavaScript. It is more efficient
than JSON, especially when using an array with optional items.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetObject()->js_encode()
json_decode({string}) *json_decode()* *E491*
This parses a JSON formatted string and returns the equivalent
in Vim values. See |json_encode()| for the relation between
JSON and Vim values.
The decoding is permissive:
- A trailing comma in an array and object is ignored, e.g.
"[1, 2, ]" is the same as "[1, 2]".
- Integer keys are accepted in objects, e.g. {1:2} is the
same as {"1":2}.
- More floating point numbers are recognized, e.g. "1." for
"1.0", or "001.2" for "1.2". Special floating point values
"Infinity", "-Infinity" and "NaN" (capitalization ignored)
are accepted.
- Leading zeroes in integer numbers are ignored, e.g. "012"
for "12" or "-012" for "-12".
- Capitalization is ignored in literal names null, true or
false, e.g. "NULL" for "null", "True" for "true".
- Control characters U+0000 through U+001F which are not
escaped in strings are accepted, e.g. " " (tab
character in string) for "\t".
- An empty JSON expression or made of only spaces is accepted
and results in v:none.
- Backslash in an invalid 2-character sequence escape is
ignored, e.g. "\a" is decoded as "a".
- A correct surrogate pair in JSON strings should normally be
a 12 character sequence such as "\uD834\uDD1E", but
json_decode() silently accepts truncated surrogate pairs
such as "\uD834" or "\uD834\u"
*E938*
A duplicate key in an object, valid in rfc7159, is not
accepted by json_decode() as the result must be a valid Vim
type, e.g. this fails: {"a":"b", "a":"c"}
Can also be used as a |method|: >
ReadObject()->json_decode()
json_encode({expr}) *json_encode()*
Encode {expr} as JSON and return this as a string.
The encoding is specified in:
https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7159.html
Vim values are converted as follows: *E1161*
|Number| decimal number
|Float| floating point number
Float nan "NaN"
Float inf "Infinity"
Float -inf "-Infinity"
|String| in double quotes (possibly null)
|Funcref| not possible, error
|List| as an array (possibly null); when
used recursively: []
|Dict| as an object (possibly null); when
used recursively: {}
|Blob| as an array of the individual bytes
v:false "false"
v:true "true"
v:none "null"
v:null "null"
Note that NaN and Infinity are passed on as values. This is
missing in the JSON standard, but several implementations do
allow it. If not then you will get an error.
If a string contains an illegal character then the replacement
character 0xfffd is used.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetObject()->json_encode()
keys({dict}) *keys()*
Return a |List| with all the keys of {dict}. The |List| is in
arbitrary order. Also see |items()| and |values()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
mydict->keys()
keytrans({string}) *keytrans()*
Turn the internal byte representation of keys into a form that
can be used for |:map|. E.g. >
:let xx = "\<C-Home>"
:echo keytrans(xx)
< <C-Home>
Can also be used as a |method|: >
"\<C-Home>"->keytrans()
< *len()* *E701*
len({expr}) The result is a Number, which is the length of the argument.
When {expr} is a String or a Number the length in bytes is
used, as with |strlen()|.
When {expr} is a |List| the number of items in the |List| is
returned.
When {expr} is a |Blob| the number of bytes is returned.
When {expr} is a |Dictionary| the number of entries in the
|Dictionary| is returned.
Otherwise an error is given and returns zero.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
mylist->len()
< *libcall()* *E364* *E368*
libcall({libname}, {funcname}, {argument})
Call function {funcname} in the run-time library {libname}
with single argument {argument}.
This is useful to call functions in a library that you
especially made to be used with Vim. Since only one argument
is possible, calling standard library functions is rather
limited.
The result is the String returned by the function. If the
function returns NULL, this will appear as an empty string ""
to Vim.
If the function returns a number, use libcallnr()!
If {argument} is a number, it is passed to the function as an
int; if {argument} is a string, it is passed as a
null-terminated string.
This function will fail in |restricted-mode|.
libcall() allows you to write your own 'plug-in' extensions to
Vim without having to recompile the program. It is NOT a
means to call system functions! If you try to do so Vim will
very probably crash.
For Win32, the functions you write must be placed in a DLL
and use the normal C calling convention (NOT Pascal which is
used in Windows System DLLs). The function must take exactly
one parameter, either a character pointer or a long integer,
and must return a character pointer or NULL. The character
pointer returned must point to memory that will remain valid
after the function has returned (e.g. in static data in the
DLL). If it points to allocated memory, that memory will
leak away. Using a static buffer in the function should work,
it's then freed when the DLL is unloaded.
WARNING: If the function returns a non-valid pointer, Vim may
crash! This also happens if the function returns a number,
because Vim thinks it's a pointer.
For Win32 systems, {libname} should be the filename of the DLL
without the ".DLL" suffix. A full path is only required if
the DLL is not in the usual places.
For Unix: When compiling your own plugins, remember that the
object code must be compiled as position-independent ('PIC').
{only in Win32 and some Unix versions, when the |+libcall|
feature is present}
Examples: >
:echo libcall("libc.so", "getenv", "HOME")
< Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
third argument: >
GetValue()->libcall("libc.so", "getenv")
<
*libcallnr()*
libcallnr({libname}, {funcname}, {argument})
Just like |libcall()|, but used for a function that returns an
int instead of a string.
{only in Win32 on some Unix versions, when the |+libcall|
feature is present}
Examples: >
:echo libcallnr("/usr/lib/libc.so", "getpid", "")
:call libcallnr("libc.so", "printf", "Hello World!\n")
:call libcallnr("libc.so", "sleep", 10)
<
Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
third argument: >
GetValue()->libcallnr("libc.so", "printf")
<
line({expr} [, {winid}]) *line()*
The result is a Number, which is the line number of the file
position given with {expr}. The {expr} argument is a string.
The accepted positions are: *E1209*
. the cursor position
$ the last line in the current buffer
'x position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is
returned)
w0 first line visible in current window (one if the
display isn't updated, e.g. in silent Ex mode)
w$ last line visible in current window (this is one
less than "w0" if no lines are visible)
v In Visual mode: the start of the Visual area (the
cursor is the end). When not in Visual mode
returns the cursor position. Differs from |'<| in
that it's updated right away.
Note that a mark in another file can be used. The line number
then applies to another buffer.
To get the column number use |col()|. To get both use
|getpos()|.
With the optional {winid} argument the values are obtained for
that window instead of the current window.
Returns 0 for invalid values of {expr} and {winid}.
Examples: >
line(".") line number of the cursor
line(".", winid) idem, in window "winid"
line("'t") line number of mark t
line("'" .. marker) line number of mark marker
<
To jump to the last known position when opening a file see
|last-position-jump|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetValue()->line()
line2byte({lnum}) *line2byte()*
Return the byte count from the start of the buffer for line
{lnum}. This includes the end-of-line character, depending on
the 'fileformat' option for the current buffer. The first
line returns 1. 'encoding' matters, 'fileencoding' is ignored.
This can also be used to get the byte count for the line just
below the last line: >
line2byte(line("$") + 1)
< This is the buffer size plus one. If 'fileencoding' is empty
it is the file size plus one. {lnum} is used like with
|getline()|. When {lnum} is invalid, or the |+byte_offset|
feature has been disabled at compile time, -1 is returned.
Also see |byte2line()|, |go| and |:goto|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetLnum()->line2byte()
lispindent({lnum}) *lispindent()*
Get the amount of indent for line {lnum} according the lisp
indenting rules, as with 'lisp'.
The indent is counted in spaces, the value of 'tabstop' is
relevant. {lnum} is used just like in |getline()|.
When {lnum} is invalid -1 is returned. In |Vim9| script an
error is given.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetLnum()->lispindent()
list2blob({list}) *list2blob()*
Return a Blob concatenating all the number values in {list}.
Examples: >
list2blob([1, 2, 3, 4]) returns 0z01020304
list2blob([]) returns 0z
< Returns an empty Blob on error. If one of the numbers is
negative or more than 255 error *E1239* is given.
|blob2list()| does the opposite.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetList()->list2blob()
list2str({list} [, {utf8}]) *list2str()*
Convert each number in {list} to a character string can
concatenate them all. Examples: >
list2str([32]) returns " "
list2str([65, 66, 67]) returns "ABC"
< The same can be done (slowly) with: >
join(map(list, {nr, val -> nr2char(val)}), '')
< |str2list()| does the opposite.
When {utf8} is omitted or zero, the current 'encoding' is used.
When {utf8} is TRUE, always return UTF-8 characters.
With UTF-8 composing characters work as expected: >
list2str([97, 769]) returns "á"
<
Returns an empty string on error.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetList()->list2str()
listener_add({callback} [, {buf}]) *listener_add()*
Add a callback function that will be invoked when changes have
been made to buffer {buf}.
{buf} refers to a buffer name or number. For the accepted
values, see |bufname()|. When {buf} is omitted the current
buffer is used.
Returns a unique ID that can be passed to |listener_remove()|.
The {callback} is invoked with five arguments:
bufnr the buffer that was changed
start first changed line number
end first line number below the change
added number of lines added, negative if lines were
deleted
changes a List of items with details about the changes
Example: >
func Listener(bufnr, start, end, added, changes)
echo 'lines ' .. a:start .. ' until ' .. a:end .. ' changed'
endfunc
call listener_add('Listener', bufnr)
< The List cannot be changed. Each item in "changes" is a
dictionary with these entries:
lnum the first line number of the change
end the first line below the change
added number of lines added; negative if lines were
deleted
col first column in "lnum" that was affected by
the change; one if unknown or the whole line
was affected; this is a byte index, first
character has a value of one.
When lines are inserted (not when a line is split, e.g. by
typing CR in Insert mode) the values are:
lnum line above which the new line is added
end equal to "lnum"
added number of lines inserted
col 1
When lines are deleted the values are:
lnum the first deleted line
end the line below the first deleted line, before
the deletion was done
added negative, number of lines deleted
col 1
When lines are changed:
lnum the first changed line
end the line below the last changed line
added 0
col first column with a change or 1
The entries are in the order the changes were made, thus the
most recent change is at the end. The line numbers are valid
when the callback is invoked, but later changes may make them
invalid, thus keeping a copy for later might not work.
The {callback} is invoked just before the screen is updated,
when |listener_flush()| is called or when a change is being
made that changes the line count in a way it causes a line
number in the list of changes to become invalid.
The {callback} is invoked with the text locked, see
|textlock|. If you do need to make changes to the buffer, use
a timer to do this later |timer_start()|.
The {callback} is not invoked when the buffer is first loaded.
Use the |BufReadPost| autocmd event to handle the initial text
of a buffer.
The {callback} is also not invoked when the buffer is
unloaded, use the |BufUnload| autocmd event for that.
Returns zero if {callback} or {buf} is invalid.
Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
second argument: >
GetBuffer()->listener_add(callback)
listener_flush([{buf}]) *listener_flush()*
Invoke listener callbacks for buffer {buf}. If there are no
pending changes then no callbacks are invoked.
{buf} refers to a buffer name or number. For the accepted
values, see |bufname()|. When {buf} is omitted the current
buffer is used.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetBuffer()->listener_flush()
listener_remove({id}) *listener_remove()*
Remove a listener previously added with listener_add().
Returns FALSE when {id} could not be found, TRUE when {id} was
removed.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetListenerId()->listener_remove()
localtime() *localtime()*
Return the current time, measured as seconds since 1st Jan
1970. See also |strftime()|, |strptime()| and |getftime()|.
log({expr}) *log()*
Return the natural logarithm (base e) of {expr} as a |Float|.
{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range
(0, inf].
Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|.
Examples: >
:echo log(10)
< 2.302585 >
:echo log(exp(5))
< 5.0
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Compute()->log()
log10({expr}) *log10()*
Return the logarithm of Float {expr} to base 10 as a |Float|.
{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|.
Examples: >
:echo log10(1000)
< 3.0 >
:echo log10(0.01)
< -2.0
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Compute()->log10()
luaeval({expr} [, {expr}]) *luaeval()*
Evaluate Lua expression {expr} and return its result converted
to Vim data structures. Second {expr} may hold additional
argument accessible as _A inside first {expr}.
Strings are returned as they are.
Boolean objects are converted to numbers.
Numbers are converted to |Float| values.
Dictionaries and lists obtained by vim.eval() are returned
as-is.
Other objects are returned as zero without any errors.
See |lua-luaeval| for more details.
Note that in a `:def` function local variables are not visible
to {expr}.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetExpr()->luaeval()
< {only available when compiled with the |+lua| feature}
map({expr1}, {expr2}) *map()*
{expr1} must be a |List|, |String|, |Blob| or |Dictionary|.
When {expr1} is a |List| or |Dictionary|, replace each
item in {expr1} with the result of evaluating {expr2}.
For a |Blob| each byte is replaced.
For a |String|, each character, including composing
characters, is replaced.
If the item type changes you may want to use |mapnew()| to
create a new List or Dictionary. This is required when using
Vim9 script.
{expr2} must be a |String| or |Funcref|.
If {expr2} is a |String|, inside {expr2} |v:val| has the value
of the current item. For a |Dictionary| |v:key| has the key
of the current item and for a |List| |v:key| has the index of
the current item. For a |Blob| |v:key| has the index of the
current byte. For a |String| |v:key| has the index of the
current character.
Example: >
:call map(mylist, '"> " .. v:val .. " <"')
< This puts "> " before and " <" after each item in "mylist".
Note that {expr2} is the result of an expression and is then
used as an expression again. Often it is good to use a
|literal-string| to avoid having to double backslashes. You
still have to double ' quotes
If {expr2} is a |Funcref| it is called with two arguments:
1. The key or the index of the current item.
2. the value of the current item.
With a legacy script lambda you don't get an error if it only
accepts one argument, but with a Vim9 lambda you get "E1106:
One argument too many", the number of arguments must match.
The function must return the new value of the item. Example
that changes each value by "key-value": >
func KeyValue(key, val)
return a:key .. '-' .. a:val
endfunc
call map(myDict, function('KeyValue'))
< It is shorter when using a |lambda|: >
call map(myDict, {key, val -> key .. '-' .. val})
< If you do not use "val" you can leave it out: >
call map(myDict, {key -> 'item: ' .. key})
< If you do not use "key" you can use a short name: >
call map(myDict, {_, val -> 'item: ' .. val})
<
The operation is done in-place for a |List| and |Dictionary|.
If you want it to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
:let tlist = map(copy(mylist), ' v:val .. "\t"')
< Returns {expr1}, the |List| or |Dictionary| that was filtered,
or a new |Blob| or |String|.
When an error is encountered while evaluating {expr2} no
further items in {expr1} are processed.
When {expr2} is a Funcref errors inside a function are ignored,
unless it was defined with the "abort" flag.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
mylist->map(expr2)
maparg({name} [, {mode} [, {abbr} [, {dict}]]]) *maparg()*
When {dict} is omitted or zero: Return the rhs of mapping
{name} in mode {mode}. The returned String has special
characters translated like in the output of the ":map" command
listing. When {dict} is TRUE a dictionary is returned, see
below. To get a list of all mappings see |maplist()|.
When there is no mapping for {name}, an empty String is
returned if {dict} is FALSE, otherwise returns an empty Dict.
When the mapping for {name} is empty, then "<Nop>" is
returned.
The {name} can have special key names, like in the ":map"
command.
{mode} can be one of these strings:
"n" Normal
"v" Visual (including Select)
"o" Operator-pending
"i" Insert
"c" Cmd-line
"s" Select
"x" Visual
"l" langmap |language-mapping|
"t" Terminal-Job
"" Normal, Visual and Operator-pending
When {mode} is omitted, the modes for "" are used.
When {abbr} is there and it is |TRUE| use abbreviations
instead of mappings.
When {dict} is there and it is |TRUE| return a dictionary
containing all the information of the mapping with the
following items: *mapping-dict*
"lhs" The {lhs} of the mapping as it would be typed
"lhsraw" The {lhs} of the mapping as raw bytes
"lhsrawalt" The {lhs} of the mapping as raw bytes, alternate
form, only present when it differs from "lhsraw"
"rhs" The {rhs} of the mapping as typed.
"silent" 1 for a |:map-silent| mapping, else 0.
"noremap" 1 if the {rhs} of the mapping is not remappable.
"script" 1 if mapping was defined with <script>.
"expr" 1 for an expression mapping (|:map-<expr>|).
"buffer" 1 for a buffer local mapping (|:map-local|).
"mode" Modes for which the mapping is defined. In
addition to the modes mentioned above, these
characters will be used:
" " Normal, Visual and Operator-pending
"!" Insert and Commandline mode
(|mapmode-ic|)
"sid" The script local ID, used for <sid> mappings
(|<SID>|).
"scriptversion" The version of the script. 999999 for
|Vim9| script.
"lnum" The line number in "sid", zero if unknown.
"nowait" Do not wait for other, longer mappings.
(|:map-<nowait>|).
"abbr" True if this is an abbreviation |abbreviations|.
"mode_bits" Vim's internal binary representation of "mode".
|mapset()| ignores this; only "mode" is used.
See |maplist()| for usage examples. The values
are from src/vim.h and may change in the future.
The dictionary can be used to restore a mapping with
|mapset()|.
The mappings local to the current buffer are checked first,
then the global mappings.
This function can be used to map a key even when it's already
mapped, and have it do the original mapping too. Sketch: >
exe 'nnoremap <Tab> ==' .. maparg('<Tab>', 'n')
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetKey()->maparg('n')
mapcheck({name} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]]) *mapcheck()*
Check if there is a mapping that matches with {name} in mode
{mode}. See |maparg()| for {mode} and special names in
{name}.
When {abbr} is there and it is |TRUE| use abbreviations
instead of mappings.
A match happens with a mapping that starts with {name} and
with a mapping which is equal to the start of {name}.
matches mapping "a" "ab" "abc" ~
mapcheck("a") yes yes yes
mapcheck("abc") yes yes yes
mapcheck("ax") yes no no
mapcheck("b") no no no
The difference with maparg() is that mapcheck() finds a
mapping that matches with {name}, while maparg() only finds a
mapping for {name} exactly.
When there is no mapping that starts with {name}, an empty
String is returned. If there is one, the RHS of that mapping
is returned. If there are several mappings that start with
{name}, the RHS of one of them is returned. This will be
"<Nop>" if the RHS is empty.
The mappings local to the current buffer are checked first,
then the global mappings.
This function can be used to check if a mapping can be added
without being ambiguous. Example: >
:if mapcheck("_vv") == ""
: map _vv :set guifont=7x13<CR>
:endif
< This avoids adding the "_vv" mapping when there already is a
mapping for "_v" or for "_vvv".
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetKey()->mapcheck('n')
maplist([{abbr}]) *maplist()*
Returns a |List| of all mappings. Each List item is a |Dict|,
the same as what is returned by |maparg()|, see
|mapping-dict|. When {abbr} is there and it is |TRUE| use
abbreviations instead of mappings.
Example to show all mappings with 'MultiMatch' in rhs: >
vim9script
echo maplist()->filter(
(_, m) => match(m.rhs, 'MultiMatch') >= 0)
< It can be tricky to find mappings for particular |:map-modes|.
|mapping-dict|'s "mode_bits" can simplify this. For example,
the mode_bits for Normal, Insert or Command-line modes are
0x19. To find all the mappings available in those modes you
can do: >
vim9script
var saved_maps = []
for m in maplist()
if and(m.mode_bits, 0x19) != 0
saved_maps->add(m)
endif
endfor
echo saved_maps->mapnew((_, m) => m.lhs)
< The values of the mode_bits are defined in Vim's src/vim.h
file and they can be discovered at runtime using
|:map-commands| and "maplist()". Example: >
vim9script
omap xyzzy <Nop>
var op_bit = maplist()->filter(
(_, m) => m.lhs == 'xyzzy')[0].mode_bits
ounmap xyzzy
echo printf("Operator-pending mode bit: 0x%x", op_bit)
mapnew({expr1}, {expr2}) *mapnew()*
Like |map()| but instead of replacing items in {expr1} a new
List or Dictionary is created and returned. {expr1} remains
unchanged. Items can still be changed by {expr2}, if you
don't want that use |deepcopy()| first.
mapset({mode}, {abbr}, {dict}) *mapset()*
mapset({dict})
Restore a mapping from a dictionary, possibly returned by
|maparg()| or |maplist()|. A buffer mapping, when dict.buffer
is true, is set on the current buffer; it is up to the caller
to ensure that the intended buffer is the current buffer. This
feature allows copying mappings from one buffer to another.
The dict.mode value may restore a single mapping that covers
more than one mode, like with mode values of '!', ' ', 'nox',
or 'v'. *E1276*
In the first form, {mode} and {abbr} should be the same as
for the call to |maparg()|. *E460*
{mode} is used to define the mode in which the mapping is set,
not the "mode" entry in {dict}.
Example for saving and restoring a mapping: >
let save_map = maparg('K', 'n', 0, 1)
nnoremap K somethingelse
...
call mapset('n', 0, save_map)
< Note that if you are going to replace a map in several modes,
e.g. with `:map!`, you need to save/restore the mapping for
all of them, when they might differ.
In the second form, with {dict} as the only argument, mode
and abbr are taken from the dict.
Example: >
vim9script
var save_maps = maplist()->filter(
(_, m) => m.lhs == 'K')
nnoremap K somethingelse
cnoremap K somethingelse2
# ...
unmap K
for d in save_maps
mapset(d)
endfor
match({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) *match()*
When {expr} is a |List| then this returns the index of the
first item where {pat} matches. Each item is used as a
String, |Lists| and |Dictionaries| are used as echoed.
Otherwise, {expr} is used as a String. The result is a
Number, which gives the index (byte offset) in {expr} where
{pat} matches.
A match at the first character or |List| item returns zero.
If there is no match -1 is returned.
For getting submatches see |matchlist()|.
Example: >
:echo match("testing", "ing") " results in 4
:echo match([1, 'x'], '\a') " results in 1
< See |string-match| for how {pat} is used.
*strpbrk()*
Vim doesn't have a strpbrk() function. But you can do: >
:let sepidx = match(line, '[.,;: \t]')
< *strcasestr()*
Vim doesn't have a strcasestr() function. But you can add
"\c" to the pattern to ignore case: >
:let idx = match(haystack, '\cneedle')
<
If {start} is given, the search starts from byte index
{start} in a String or item {start} in a |List|.
The result, however, is still the index counted from the
first character/item. Example: >
:echo match("testing", "ing", 2)
< result is again "4". >
:echo match("testing", "ing", 4)
< result is again "4". >
:echo match("testing", "t", 2)
< result is "3".
For a String, if {start} > 0 then it is like the string starts
{start} bytes later, thus "^" will match at {start}. Except
when {count} is given, then it's like matches before the
{start} byte are ignored (this is a bit complicated to keep it
backwards compatible).
For a String, if {start} < 0, it will be set to 0. For a list
the index is counted from the end.
If {start} is out of range ({start} > strlen({expr}) for a
String or {start} > len({expr}) for a |List|) -1 is returned.
When {count} is given use the {count}'th match. When a match
is found in a String the search for the next one starts one
character further. Thus this example results in 1: >
echo match("testing", "..", 0, 2)
< In a |List| the search continues in the next item.
Note that when {count} is added the way {start} works changes,
see above.
See |pattern| for the patterns that are accepted.
The 'ignorecase' option is used to set the ignore-caseness of
the pattern. 'smartcase' is NOT used. The matching is always
done like 'magic' is set and 'cpoptions' is empty.
Note that a match at the start is preferred, thus when the
pattern is using "*" (any number of matches) it tends to find
zero matches at the start instead of a number of matches
further down in the text.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetText()->match('word')
GetList()->match('word')
<
*matchadd()* *E290* *E798* *E799* *E801* *E957*
matchadd({group}, {pattern} [, {priority} [, {id} [, {dict}]]])
Defines a pattern to be highlighted in the current window (a
"match"). It will be highlighted with {group}. Returns an
identification number (ID), which can be used to delete the
match using |matchdelete()|. The ID is bound to the window.
Matching is case sensitive and magic, unless case sensitivity
or magicness are explicitly overridden in {pattern}. The
'magic', 'smartcase' and 'ignorecase' options are not used.
The "Conceal" value is special, it causes the match to be
concealed.
The optional {priority} argument assigns a priority to the
match. A match with a high priority will have its
highlighting overrule that of a match with a lower priority.
A priority is specified as an integer (negative numbers are no
exception). If the {priority} argument is not specified, the
default priority is 10. The priority of 'hlsearch' is zero,
hence all matches with a priority greater than zero will
overrule it. Syntax highlighting (see 'syntax') is a separate
mechanism, and regardless of the chosen priority a match will
always overrule syntax highlighting.
The optional {id} argument allows the request for a specific
match ID. If a specified ID is already taken, an error
message will appear and the match will not be added. An ID
is specified as a positive integer (zero excluded). IDs 1, 2
and 3 are reserved for |:match|, |:2match| and |:3match|,
respectively. 3 is reserved for use by the |matchparen|
plugin.
If the {id} argument is not specified or -1, |matchadd()|
automatically chooses a free ID, which is at least 1000.
The optional {dict} argument allows for further custom
values. Currently this is used to specify a match specific
conceal character that will be shown for |hl-Conceal|
highlighted matches. The dict can have the following members:
conceal Special character to show instead of the
match (only for |hl-Conceal| highlighted
matches, see |:syn-cchar|)
window Instead of the current window use the
window with this number or window ID.
The number of matches is not limited, as it is the case with
the |:match| commands.
Returns -1 on error.
Example: >
:highlight MyGroup ctermbg=green guibg=green
:let m = matchadd("MyGroup", "TODO")
< Deletion of the pattern: >
:call matchdelete(m)
< A list of matches defined by |matchadd()| and |:match| are
available from |getmatches()|. All matches can be deleted in
one operation by |clearmatches()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetGroup()->matchadd('TODO')
<
*matchaddpos()*
matchaddpos({group}, {pos} [, {priority} [, {id} [, {dict}]]])
Same as |matchadd()|, but requires a list of positions {pos}
instead of a pattern. This command is faster than |matchadd()|
because it does not require to handle regular expressions and
sets buffer line boundaries to redraw screen. It is supposed
to be used when fast match additions and deletions are
required, for example to highlight matching parentheses.
{pos} is a list of positions. Each position can be one of
these:
- A number. This whole line will be highlighted. The first
line has number 1.
- A list with one number, e.g., [23]. The whole line with this
number will be highlighted.
- A list with two numbers, e.g., [23, 11]. The first number is
the line number, the second one is the column number (first
column is 1, the value must correspond to the byte index as
|col()| would return). The character at this position will
be highlighted.
- A list with three numbers, e.g., [23, 11, 3]. As above, but
the third number gives the length of the highlight in bytes.
Returns -1 on error.
Example: >
:highlight MyGroup ctermbg=green guibg=green
:let m = matchaddpos("MyGroup", [[23, 24], 34])
< Deletion of the pattern: >
:call matchdelete(m)
< Matches added by |matchaddpos()| are returned by
|getmatches()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetGroup()->matchaddpos([23, 11])
matcharg({nr}) *matcharg()*
Selects the {nr} match item, as set with a |:match|,
|:2match| or |:3match| command.
Return a |List| with two elements:
The name of the highlight group used
The pattern used.
When {nr} is not 1, 2 or 3 returns an empty |List|.
When there is no match item set returns ['', ''].
This is useful to save and restore a |:match|.
Highlighting matches using the |:match| commands are limited
to three matches. |matchadd()| does not have this limitation.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetMatch()->matcharg()
matchdelete({id} [, {win}) *matchdelete()* *E802* *E803*
Deletes a match with ID {id} previously defined by |matchadd()|
or one of the |:match| commands. Returns 0 if successful,
otherwise -1. See example for |matchadd()|. All matches can
be deleted in one operation by |clearmatches()|.
If {win} is specified, use the window with this number or
window ID instead of the current window.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetMatch()->matchdelete()
matchend({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) *matchend()*
Same as |match()|, but return the index of first character
after the match. Example: >
:echo matchend("testing", "ing")
< results in "7".
*strspn()* *strcspn()*
Vim doesn't have a strspn() or strcspn() function, but you can
do it with matchend(): >
:let span = matchend(line, '[a-zA-Z]')
:let span = matchend(line, '[^a-zA-Z]')
< Except that -1 is returned when there are no matches.
The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. >
:echo matchend("testing", "ing", 2)
< results in "7". >
:echo matchend("testing", "ing", 5)
< result is "-1".
When {expr} is a |List| the result is equal to |match()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetText()->matchend('word')
matchfuzzy({list}, {str} [, {dict}]) *matchfuzzy()*
If {list} is a list of strings, then returns a |List| with all
the strings in {list} that fuzzy match {str}. The strings in
the returned list are sorted based on the matching score.
The optional {dict} argument always supports the following
items:
matchseq When this item is present return only matches
that contain the characters in {str} in the
given sequence.
limit Maximum number of matches in {list} to be
returned. Zero means no limit.
If {list} is a list of dictionaries, then the optional {dict}
argument supports the following additional items:
key Key of the item which is fuzzy matched against
{str}. The value of this item should be a
string.
text_cb |Funcref| that will be called for every item
in {list} to get the text for fuzzy matching.
This should accept a dictionary item as the
argument and return the text for that item to
use for fuzzy matching.
{str} is treated as a literal string and regular expression
matching is NOT supported. The maximum supported {str} length
is 256.
When {str} has multiple words each separated by white space,
then the list of strings that have all the words is returned.
If there are no matching strings or there is an error, then an
empty list is returned. If length of {str} is greater than
256, then returns an empty list.
When {limit} is given, matchfuzzy() will find up to this
number of matches in {list} and return them in sorted order.
Refer to |fuzzy-matching| for more information about fuzzy
matching strings.
Example: >
:echo matchfuzzy(["clay", "crow"], "cay")
< results in ["clay"]. >
:echo getbufinfo()->map({_, v -> v.name})->matchfuzzy("ndl")
< results in a list of buffer names fuzzy matching "ndl". >
:echo getbufinfo()->matchfuzzy("ndl", {'key' : 'name'})
< results in a list of buffer information dicts with buffer
names fuzzy matching "ndl". >
:echo getbufinfo()->matchfuzzy("spl",
\ {'text_cb' : {v -> v.name}})
< results in a list of buffer information dicts with buffer
names fuzzy matching "spl". >
:echo v:oldfiles->matchfuzzy("test")
< results in a list of file names fuzzy matching "test". >
:let l = readfile("buffer.c")->matchfuzzy("str")
< results in a list of lines in "buffer.c" fuzzy matching "str". >
:echo ['one two', 'two one']->matchfuzzy('two one')
< results in ['two one', 'one two']. >
:echo ['one two', 'two one']->matchfuzzy('two one',
\ {'matchseq': 1})
< results in ['two one'].
matchfuzzypos({list}, {str} [, {dict}]) *matchfuzzypos()*
Same as |matchfuzzy()|, but returns the list of matched
strings, the list of character positions where characters
in {str} matches and a list of matching scores. You can
use |byteidx()| to convert a character position to a byte
position.
If {str} matches multiple times in a string, then only the
positions for the best match is returned.
If there are no matching strings or there is an error, then a
list with three empty list items is returned.
Example: >
:echo matchfuzzypos(['testing'], 'tsg')
< results in [['testing'], [[0, 2, 6]], [99]] >
:echo matchfuzzypos(['clay', 'lacy'], 'la')
< results in [['lacy', 'clay'], [[0, 1], [1, 2]], [153, 133]] >
:echo [{'text': 'hello', 'id' : 10}]->matchfuzzypos('ll', {'key' : 'text'})
< results in [[{'id': 10, 'text': 'hello'}], [[2, 3]], [127]]
matchlist({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) *matchlist()*
Same as |match()|, but return a |List|. The first item in the
list is the matched string, same as what matchstr() would
return. Following items are submatches, like "\1", "\2", etc.
in |:substitute|. When an optional submatch didn't match an
empty string is used. Example: >
echo matchlist('acd', '\(a\)\?\(b\)\?\(c\)\?\(.*\)')
< Results in: ['acd', 'a', '', 'c', 'd', '', '', '', '', '']
When there is no match an empty list is returned.
You can pass in a List, but that is not very useful.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetText()->matchlist('word')
matchstr({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) *matchstr()*
Same as |match()|, but return the matched string. Example: >
:echo matchstr("testing", "ing")
< results in "ing".
When there is no match "" is returned.
The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. >
:echo matchstr("testing", "ing", 2)
< results in "ing". >
:echo matchstr("testing", "ing", 5)
< result is "".
When {expr} is a |List| then the matching item is returned.
The type isn't changed, it's not necessarily a String.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetText()->matchstr('word')
matchstrpos({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) *matchstrpos()*
Same as |matchstr()|, but return the matched string, the start
position and the end position of the match. Example: >
:echo matchstrpos("testing", "ing")
< results in ["ing", 4, 7].
When there is no match ["", -1, -1] is returned.
The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. >
:echo matchstrpos("testing", "ing", 2)
< results in ["ing", 4, 7]. >
:echo matchstrpos("testing", "ing", 5)
< result is ["", -1, -1].
When {expr} is a |List| then the matching item, the index
of first item where {pat} matches, the start position and the
end position of the match are returned. >
:echo matchstrpos([1, '__x'], '\a')
< result is ["x", 1, 2, 3].
The type isn't changed, it's not necessarily a String.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetText()->matchstrpos('word')
<
*max()*
max({expr}) Return the maximum value of all items in {expr}. Example: >
echo max([apples, pears, oranges])
< {expr} can be a |List| or a |Dictionary|. For a Dictionary,
it returns the maximum of all values in the Dictionary.
If {expr} is neither a List nor a Dictionary, or one of the
items in {expr} cannot be used as a Number this results in
an error. An empty |List| or |Dictionary| results in zero.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
mylist->max()
menu_info({name} [, {mode}]) *menu_info()*
Return information about the specified menu {name} in
mode {mode}. The menu name should be specified without the
shortcut character ('&'). If {name} is "", then the top-level
menu names are returned.
{mode} can be one of these strings:
"n" Normal
"v" Visual (including Select)
"o" Operator-pending
"i" Insert
"c" Cmd-line
"s" Select
"x" Visual
"t" Terminal-Job
"" Normal, Visual and Operator-pending
"!" Insert and Cmd-line
When {mode} is omitted, the modes for "" are used.
Returns a |Dictionary| containing the following items:
accel menu item accelerator text |menu-text|
display display name (name without '&')
enabled v:true if this menu item is enabled
Refer to |:menu-enable|
icon name of the icon file (for toolbar)
|toolbar-icon|
iconidx index of a built-in icon
modes modes for which the menu is defined. In
addition to the modes mentioned above, these
characters will be used:
" " Normal, Visual and Operator-pending
name menu item name.
noremenu v:true if the {rhs} of the menu item is not
remappable else v:false.
priority menu order priority |menu-priority|
rhs right-hand-side of the menu item. The returned
string has special characters translated like
in the output of the ":menu" command listing.
When the {rhs} of a menu item is empty, then
"<Nop>" is returned.
script v:true if script-local remapping of {rhs} is
allowed else v:false. See |:menu-script|.
shortcut shortcut key (character after '&' in
the menu name) |menu-shortcut|
silent v:true if the menu item is created
with <silent> argument |:menu-silent|
submenus |List| containing the names of
all the submenus. Present only if the menu
item has submenus.
Returns an empty dictionary if the menu item is not found.
Examples: >
:echo menu_info('Edit.Cut')
:echo menu_info('File.Save', 'n')
" Display the entire menu hierarchy in a buffer
func ShowMenu(name, pfx)
let m = menu_info(a:name)
call append(line('$'), a:pfx .. m.display)
for child in m->get('submenus', [])
call ShowMenu(a:name .. '.' .. escape(child, '.'),
\ a:pfx .. ' ')
endfor
endfunc
new
for topmenu in menu_info('').submenus
call ShowMenu(topmenu, '')
endfor
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetMenuName()->menu_info('v')
< *min()*
min({expr}) Return the minimum value of all items in {expr}. Example: >
echo min([apples, pears, oranges])
< {expr} can be a |List| or a |Dictionary|. For a Dictionary,
it returns the minimum of all values in the Dictionary.
If {expr} is neither a List nor a Dictionary, or one of the
items in {expr} cannot be used as a Number this results in
an error. An empty |List| or |Dictionary| results in zero.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
mylist->min()
< *mkdir()* *E739*
mkdir({name} [, {flags} [, {prot}]])
Create directory {name}.
When {flags} is present it must be a string. An empty string
has no effect.
If {flags} contains "p" then intermediate directories are
created as necessary.
If {flags} contains "D" then {name} is deleted at the end of
the current function, as with: >
defer delete({name}, 'd')
<
If {flags} contains "R" then {name} is deleted recursively at
the end of the current function, as with: >
defer delete({name}, 'rf')
< Note that when {name} has more than one part and "p" is used
some directories may already exist. Only the first one that
is created and what it contains is scheduled to be deleted.
E.g. when using: >
call mkdir('subdir/tmp/autoload', 'pR')
< and "subdir" already exists then "subdir/tmp" will be
scheduled for deletion, like with: >
defer delete('subdir/tmp', 'rf')
< Note that if scheduling the defer fails the directory is not
deleted. This should only happen when out of memory.
If {prot} is given it is used to set the protection bits of
the new directory. The default is 0o755 (rwxr-xr-x: r/w for
the user, readable for others). Use 0o700 to make it
unreadable for others. This is only used for the last part of
{name}. Thus if you create /tmp/foo/bar then /tmp/foo will be
created with 0o755.
Example: >
:call mkdir($HOME .. "/tmp/foo/bar", "p", 0o700)
< This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
There is no error if the directory already exists and the "p"
flag is passed (since patch 8.0.1708). However, without the
"p" option the call will fail.
The function result is a Number, which is TRUE if the call was
successful or FALSE if the directory creation failed or partly
failed.
Not available on all systems. To check use: >
:if exists("*mkdir")
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetName()->mkdir()
<
*mode()*
mode([expr]) Return a string that indicates the current mode.
If [expr] is supplied and it evaluates to a non-zero Number or
a non-empty String (|non-zero-arg|), then the full mode is
returned, otherwise only the first letter is returned.
Also see |state()|.
n Normal
no Operator-pending
nov Operator-pending (forced characterwise |o_v|)
noV Operator-pending (forced linewise |o_V|)
noCTRL-V Operator-pending (forced blockwise |o_CTRL-V|);
CTRL-V is one character
niI Normal using |i_CTRL-O| in |Insert-mode|
niR Normal using |i_CTRL-O| in |Replace-mode|
niV Normal using |i_CTRL-O| in |Virtual-Replace-mode|
nt Terminal-Normal (insert goes to Terminal-Job mode)
v Visual by character
vs Visual by character using |v_CTRL-O| in Select mode
V Visual by line
Vs Visual by line using |v_CTRL-O| in Select mode
CTRL-V Visual blockwise
CTRL-Vs Visual blockwise using |v_CTRL-O| in Select mode
s Select by character
S Select by line
CTRL-S Select blockwise
i Insert
ic Insert mode completion |compl-generic|
ix Insert mode |i_CTRL-X| completion
R Replace |R|
Rc Replace mode completion |compl-generic|
Rx Replace mode |i_CTRL-X| completion
Rv Virtual Replace |gR|
Rvc Virtual Replace mode completion |compl-generic|
Rvx Virtual Replace mode |i_CTRL-X| completion
c Command-line editing
cv Vim Ex mode |gQ|
ce Normal Ex mode |Q|
r Hit-enter prompt
rm The -- more -- prompt
r? A |:confirm| query of some sort
! Shell or external command is executing
t Terminal-Job mode: keys go to the job
This is useful in the 'statusline' option or when used
with |remote_expr()| In most other places it always returns
"c" or "n".
Note that in the future more modes and more specific modes may
be added. It's better not to compare the whole string but only
the leading character(s).
Also see |visualmode()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
DoFull()->mode()
mzeval({expr}) *mzeval()*
Evaluate MzScheme expression {expr} and return its result
converted to Vim data structures.
Numbers and strings are returned as they are.
Pairs (including lists and improper lists) and vectors are
returned as Vim |Lists|.
Hash tables are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type with keys
converted to strings.
All other types are converted to string with display function.
Examples: >
:mz (define l (list 1 2 3))
:mz (define h (make-hash)) (hash-set! h "list" l)
:echo mzeval("l")
:echo mzeval("h")
<
Note that in a `:def` function local variables are not visible
to {expr}.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetExpr()->mzeval()
<
{only available when compiled with the |+mzscheme| feature}
nextnonblank({lnum}) *nextnonblank()*
Return the line number of the first line at or below {lnum}
that is not blank. Example: >
if getline(nextnonblank(1)) =~ "Java"
< When {lnum} is invalid or there is no non-blank line at or
below it, zero is returned.
{lnum} is used like with |getline()|.
See also |prevnonblank()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetLnum()->nextnonblank()
nr2char({expr} [, {utf8}]) *nr2char()*
Return a string with a single character, which has the number
value {expr}. Examples: >
nr2char(64) returns "@"
nr2char(32) returns " "
< When {utf8} is omitted or zero, the current 'encoding' is used.
Example for "utf-8": >
nr2char(300) returns I with bow character
< When {utf8} is TRUE, always return UTF-8 characters.
Note that a NUL character in the file is specified with
nr2char(10), because NULs are represented with newline
characters. nr2char(0) is a real NUL and terminates the
string, thus results in an empty string.
To turn a list of character numbers into a string: >
let list = [65, 66, 67]
let str = join(map(list, {_, val -> nr2char(val)}), '')
< Result: "ABC"
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetNumber()->nr2char()
or({expr}, {expr}) *or()*
Bitwise OR on the two arguments. The arguments are converted
to a number. A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error.
Also see `and()` and `xor()`.
Example: >
:let bits = or(bits, 0x80)
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
:let bits = bits->or(0x80)
< Rationale: The reason this is a function and not using the "|"
character like many languages, is that Vi has always used "|"
to separate commands. In many places it would not be clear if
"|" is an operator or a command separator.
pathshorten({path} [, {len}]) *pathshorten()*
Shorten directory names in the path {path} and return the
result. The tail, the file name, is kept as-is. The other
components in the path are reduced to {len} letters in length.
If {len} is omitted or smaller than 1 then 1 is used (single
letters). Leading '~' and '.' characters are kept. Examples: >
:echo pathshorten('~/.vim/autoload/myfile.vim')
< ~/.v/a/myfile.vim ~
>
:echo pathshorten('~/.vim/autoload/myfile.vim', 2)
< ~/.vi/au/myfile.vim ~
It doesn't matter if the path exists or not.
Returns an empty string on error.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetDirectories()->pathshorten()
perleval({expr}) *perleval()*
Evaluate Perl expression {expr} in scalar context and return
its result converted to Vim data structures. If value can't be
converted, it is returned as a string Perl representation.
Note: If you want an array or hash, {expr} must return a
reference to it.
Example: >
:echo perleval('[1 .. 4]')
< [1, 2, 3, 4]
Note that in a `:def` function local variables are not visible
to {expr}.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetExpr()->perleval()
< {only available when compiled with the |+perl| feature}
popup_ functions are documented here: |popup-functions|
pow({x}, {y}) *pow()*
Return the power of {x} to the exponent {y} as a |Float|.
{x} and {y} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
Returns 0.0 if {x} or {y} is not a |Float| or a |Number|.
Examples: >
:echo pow(3, 3)
< 27.0 >
:echo pow(2, 16)
< 65536.0 >
:echo pow(32, 0.20)
< 2.0
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Compute()->pow(3)
prevnonblank({lnum}) *prevnonblank()*
Return the line number of the first line at or above {lnum}
that is not blank. Example: >
let ind = indent(prevnonblank(v:lnum - 1))
< When {lnum} is invalid or there is no non-blank line at or
above it, zero is returned.
{lnum} is used like with |getline()|.
Also see |nextnonblank()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetLnum()->prevnonblank()
printf({fmt}, {expr1} ...) *printf()*
Return a String with {fmt}, where "%" items are replaced by
the formatted form of their respective arguments. Example: >
printf("%4d: E%d %.30s", lnum, errno, msg)
< May result in:
" 99: E42 asdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfas" ~
When used as a |method| the base is passed as the second
argument: >
Compute()->printf("result: %d")
<
You can use `call()` to pass the items as a list.
Often used items are:
%s string
%6S string right-aligned in 6 display cells
%6s string right-aligned in 6 bytes
%.9s string truncated to 9 bytes
%c single byte
%d decimal number
%5d decimal number padded with spaces to 5 characters
%x hex number
%04x hex number padded with zeros to at least 4 characters
%X hex number using upper case letters
%o octal number
%08b binary number padded with zeros to at least 8 chars
%f floating point number as 12.23, inf, -inf or nan
%F floating point number as 12.23, INF, -INF or NAN
%e floating point number as 1.23e3, inf, -inf or nan
%E floating point number as 1.23E3, INF, -INF or NAN
%g floating point number, as %f or %e depending on value
%G floating point number, as %F or %E depending on value
%% the % character itself
Conversion specifications start with '%' and end with the
conversion type. All other characters are copied unchanged to
the result.
The "%" starts a conversion specification. The following
arguments appear in sequence:
% [flags] [field-width] [.precision] type
flags
Zero or more of the following flags:
# The value should be converted to an "alternate
form". For c, d, and s conversions, this option
has no effect. For o conversions, the precision
of the number is increased to force the first
character of the output string to a zero (except
if a zero value is printed with an explicit
precision of zero).
For b and B conversions, a non-zero result has
the string "0b" (or "0B" for B conversions)
prepended to it.
For x and X conversions, a non-zero result has
the string "0x" (or "0X" for X conversions)
prepended to it.
0 (zero) Zero padding. For all conversions the converted
value is padded on the left with zeros rather
than blanks. If a precision is given with a
numeric conversion (d, b, B, o, x, and X), the 0
flag is ignored.
- A negative field width flag; the converted value
is to be left adjusted on the field boundary.
The converted value is padded on the right with
blanks, rather than on the left with blanks or
zeros. A - overrides a 0 if both are given.
' ' (space) A blank should be left before a positive
number produced by a signed conversion (d).
+ A sign must always be placed before a number
produced by a signed conversion. A + overrides
a space if both are used.
field-width
An optional decimal digit string specifying a minimum
field width. If the converted value has fewer bytes
than the field width, it will be padded with spaces on
the left (or right, if the left-adjustment flag has
been given) to fill out the field width. For the S
conversion the count is in cells.
.precision
An optional precision, in the form of a period '.'
followed by an optional digit string. If the digit
string is omitted, the precision is taken as zero.
This gives the minimum number of digits to appear for
d, o, x, and X conversions, the maximum number of
bytes to be printed from a string for s conversions,
or the maximum number of cells to be printed from a
string for S conversions.
For floating point it is the number of digits after
the decimal point.
type
A character that specifies the type of conversion to
be applied, see below.
A field width or precision, or both, may be indicated by an
asterisk '*' instead of a digit string. In this case, a
Number argument supplies the field width or precision. A
negative field width is treated as a left adjustment flag
followed by a positive field width; a negative precision is
treated as though it were missing. Example: >
:echo printf("%d: %.*s", nr, width, line)
< This limits the length of the text used from "line" to
"width" bytes.
The conversion specifiers and their meanings are:
*printf-d* *printf-b* *printf-B* *printf-o*
*printf-x* *printf-X*
dbBoxX The Number argument is converted to signed decimal
(d), unsigned binary (b and B), unsigned octal (o), or
unsigned hexadecimal (x and X) notation. The letters
"abcdef" are used for x conversions; the letters
"ABCDEF" are used for X conversions.
The precision, if any, gives the minimum number of
digits that must appear; if the converted value
requires fewer digits, it is padded on the left with
zeros.
In no case does a non-existent or small field width
cause truncation of a numeric field; if the result of
a conversion is wider than the field width, the field
is expanded to contain the conversion result.
The 'h' modifier indicates the argument is 16 bits.
The 'l' modifier indicates the argument is 32 bits.
The 'L' modifier indicates the argument is 64 bits.
Generally, these modifiers are not useful. They are
ignored when type is known from the argument.
i alias for d
D alias for ld
U alias for lu
O alias for lo
*printf-c*
c The Number argument is converted to a byte, and the
resulting character is written.
*printf-s*
s The text of the String argument is used. If a
precision is specified, no more bytes than the number
specified are used.
If the argument is not a String type, it is
automatically converted to text with the same format
as ":echo".
*printf-S*
S The text of the String argument is used. If a
precision is specified, no more display cells than the
number specified are used.
*printf-f* *E807*
f F The Float argument is converted into a string of the
form 123.456. The precision specifies the number of
digits after the decimal point. When the precision is
zero the decimal point is omitted. When the precision
is not specified 6 is used. A really big number
(out of range or dividing by zero) results in "inf"
or "-inf" with %f (INF or -INF with %F).
"0.0 / 0.0" results in "nan" with %f (NAN with %F).
Example: >
echo printf("%.2f", 12.115)
< 12.12
Note that roundoff depends on the system libraries.
Use |round()| when in doubt.
*printf-e* *printf-E*
e E The Float argument is converted into a string of the
form 1.234e+03 or 1.234E+03 when using 'E'. The
precision specifies the number of digits after the
decimal point, like with 'f'.
*printf-g* *printf-G*
g G The Float argument is converted like with 'f' if the
value is between 0.001 (inclusive) and 10000000.0
(exclusive). Otherwise 'e' is used for 'g' and 'E'
for 'G'. When no precision is specified superfluous
zeroes and '+' signs are removed, except for the zero
immediately after the decimal point. Thus 10000000.0
results in 1.0e7.
*printf-%*
% A '%' is written. No argument is converted. The
complete conversion specification is "%%".
When a Number argument is expected a String argument is also
accepted and automatically converted.
When a Float or String argument is expected a Number argument
is also accepted and automatically converted.
Any other argument type results in an error message.
*E766* *E767*
The number of {exprN} arguments must exactly match the number
of "%" items. If there are not sufficient or too many
arguments an error is given. Up to 18 arguments can be used.
prompt_getprompt({buf}) *prompt_getprompt()*
Returns the effective prompt text for buffer {buf}. {buf} can
be a buffer name or number. See |prompt-buffer|.
If the buffer doesn't exist or isn't a prompt buffer, an empty
string is returned.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetBuffer()->prompt_getprompt()
< {only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
prompt_setcallback({buf}, {expr}) *prompt_setcallback()*
Set prompt callback for buffer {buf} to {expr}. When {expr}
is an empty string the callback is removed. This has only
effect if {buf} has 'buftype' set to "prompt".
The callback is invoked when pressing Enter. The current
buffer will always be the prompt buffer. A new line for a
prompt is added before invoking the callback, thus the prompt
for which the callback was invoked will be in the last but one
line.
If the callback wants to add text to the buffer, it must
insert it above the last line, since that is where the current
prompt is. This can also be done asynchronously.
The callback is invoked with one argument, which is the text
that was entered at the prompt. This can be an empty string
if the user only typed Enter.
Example: >
call prompt_setcallback(bufnr(), function('s:TextEntered'))
func s:TextEntered(text)
if a:text == 'exit' || a:text == 'quit'
stopinsert
close
else
call append(line('$') - 1, 'Entered: "' .. a:text .. '"')
" Reset 'modified' to allow the buffer to be closed.
set nomodified
endif
endfunc
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetBuffer()->prompt_setcallback(callback)
< {only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
prompt_setinterrupt({buf}, {expr}) *prompt_setinterrupt()*
Set a callback for buffer {buf} to {expr}. When {expr} is an
empty string the callback is removed. This has only effect if
{buf} has 'buftype' set to "prompt".
This callback will be invoked when pressing CTRL-C in Insert
mode. Without setting a callback Vim will exit Insert mode,
as in any buffer.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetBuffer()->prompt_setinterrupt(callback)
< {only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
prompt_setprompt({buf}, {text}) *prompt_setprompt()*
Set prompt for buffer {buf} to {text}. You most likely want
{text} to end in a space.
The result is only visible if {buf} has 'buftype' set to
"prompt". Example: >
call prompt_setprompt(bufnr(), 'command: ')
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetBuffer()->prompt_setprompt('command: ')
< {only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
prop_ functions are documented here: |text-prop-functions|
pum_getpos() *pum_getpos()*
If the popup menu (see |ins-completion-menu|) is not visible,
returns an empty |Dictionary|, otherwise, returns a
|Dictionary| with the following keys:
height nr of items visible
width screen cells
row top screen row (0 first row)
col leftmost screen column (0 first col)
size total nr of items
scrollbar |TRUE| if scrollbar is visible
The values are the same as in |v:event| during
|CompleteChanged|.
pumvisible() *pumvisible()*
Returns non-zero when the popup menu is visible, zero
otherwise. See |ins-completion-menu|.
This can be used to avoid some things that would remove the
popup menu.
py3eval({expr}) *py3eval()*
Evaluate Python expression {expr} and return its result
converted to Vim data structures.
Numbers and strings are returned as they are (strings are
copied though, Unicode strings are additionally converted to
'encoding').
Lists are represented as Vim |List| type.
Dictionaries are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type with
keys converted to strings.
Note that in a `:def` function local variables are not visible
to {expr}.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetExpr()->py3eval()
< {only available when compiled with the |+python3| feature}
*E858* *E859*
pyeval({expr}) *pyeval()*
Evaluate Python expression {expr} and return its result
converted to Vim data structures.
Numbers and strings are returned as they are (strings are
copied though).
Lists are represented as Vim |List| type.
Dictionaries are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type,
non-string keys result in error.
Note that in a `:def` function local variables are not visible
to {expr}.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetExpr()->pyeval()
< {only available when compiled with the |+python| feature}
pyxeval({expr}) *pyxeval()*
Evaluate Python expression {expr} and return its result
converted to Vim data structures.
Uses Python 2 or 3, see |python_x| and 'pyxversion'.
See also: |pyeval()|, |py3eval()|
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetExpr()->pyxeval()
< {only available when compiled with the |+python| or the
|+python3| feature}
rand([{expr}]) *rand()* *random*
Return a pseudo-random Number generated with an xoshiro128**
algorithm using seed {expr}. The returned number is 32 bits,
also on 64 bits systems, for consistency.
{expr} can be initialized by |srand()| and will be updated by
rand(). If {expr} is omitted, an internal seed value is used
and updated.
Returns -1 if {expr} is invalid.
Examples: >
:echo rand()
:let seed = srand()
:echo rand(seed)
:echo rand(seed) % 16 " random number 0 - 15
<
*E726* *E727*
range({expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]]) *range()*
Returns a |List| with Numbers:
- If only {expr} is specified: [0, 1, ..., {expr} - 1]
- If {max} is specified: [{expr}, {expr} + 1, ..., {max}]
- If {stride} is specified: [{expr}, {expr} + {stride}, ...,
{max}] (increasing {expr} with {stride} each time, not
producing a value past {max}).
When the maximum is one before the start the result is an
empty list. When the maximum is more than one before the
start this is an error.
Examples: >
range(4) " [0, 1, 2, 3]
range(2, 4) " [2, 3, 4]
range(2, 9, 3) " [2, 5, 8]
range(2, -2, -1) " [2, 1, 0, -1, -2]
range(0) " []
range(2, 0) " error!
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetExpr()->range()
<
readblob({fname} [, {offset} [, {size}]]) *readblob()*
Read file {fname} in binary mode and return a |Blob|.
If {offset} is specified, read the file from the specified
offset. If it is a negative value, it is used as an offset
from the end of the file. E.g., to read the last 12 bytes: >
readblob('file.bin', -12)
< If {size} is specified, only the specified size will be read.
E.g. to read the first 100 bytes of a file: >
readblob('file.bin', 0, 100)
< If {size} is -1 or omitted, the whole data starting from
{offset} will be read.
This can be also used to read the data from a character device
on Unix when {size} is explicitly set. Only if the device
supports seeking {offset} can be used. Otherwise it should be
zero. E.g. to read 10 bytes from a serial console: >
readblob('/dev/ttyS0', 0, 10)
< When the file can't be opened an error message is given and
the result is an empty |Blob|.
When the offset is beyond the end of the file the result is an
empty blob.
When trying to read more bytes than are available the result
is truncated.
Also see |readfile()| and |writefile()|.
readdir({directory} [, {expr} [, {dict}]]) *readdir()*
Return a list with file and directory names in {directory}.
You can also use |glob()| if you don't need to do complicated
things, such as limiting the number of matches.
The list will be sorted (case sensitive), see the {dict}
argument below for changing the sort order.
When {expr} is omitted all entries are included.
When {expr} is given, it is evaluated to check what to do:
If {expr} results in -1 then no further entries will
be handled.
If {expr} results in 0 then this entry will not be
added to the list.
If {expr} results in 1 then this entry will be added
to the list.
The entries "." and ".." are always excluded.
Each time {expr} is evaluated |v:val| is set to the entry name.
When {expr} is a function the name is passed as the argument.
For example, to get a list of files ending in ".txt": >
readdir(dirname, {n -> n =~ '.txt$'})
< To skip hidden and backup files: >
readdir(dirname, {n -> n !~ '^\.\|\~$'})
< *E857*
The optional {dict} argument allows for further custom
values. Currently this is used to specify if and how sorting
should be performed. The dict can have the following members:
sort How to sort the result returned from the system.
Valid values are:
"none" do not sort (fastest method)
"case" sort case sensitive (byte value of
each character, technically, using
strcmp()) (default)
"icase" sort case insensitive (technically
using strcasecmp())
"collate" sort using the collation order
of the "POSIX" or "C" |locale|
(technically using strcoll())
Other values are silently ignored.
For example, to get a list of all files in the current
directory without sorting the individual entries: >
readdir('.', '1', #{sort: 'none'})
< If you want to get a directory tree: >
function! s:tree(dir)
return {a:dir : map(readdir(a:dir),
\ {_, x -> isdirectory(x) ?
\ {x : s:tree(a:dir .. '/' .. x)} : x})}
endfunction
echo s:tree(".")
<
Returns an empty List on error.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetDirName()->readdir()
<
readdirex({directory} [, {expr} [, {dict}]]) *readdirex()*
Extended version of |readdir()|.
Return a list of Dictionaries with file and directory
information in {directory}.
This is useful if you want to get the attributes of file and
directory at the same time as getting a list of a directory.
This is much faster than calling |readdir()| then calling
|getfperm()|, |getfsize()|, |getftime()| and |getftype()| for
each file and directory especially on MS-Windows.
The list will by default be sorted by name (case sensitive),
the sorting can be changed by using the optional {dict}
argument, see |readdir()|.
The Dictionary for file and directory information has the
following items:
group Group name of the entry. (Only on Unix)
name Name of the entry.
perm Permissions of the entry. See |getfperm()|.
size Size of the entry. See |getfsize()|.
time Timestamp of the entry. See |getftime()|.
type Type of the entry.
On Unix, almost same as |getftype()| except:
Symlink to a dir "linkd"
Other symlink "link"
On MS-Windows:
Normal file "file"
Directory "dir"
Junction "junction"
Symlink to a dir "linkd"
Other symlink "link"
Other reparse point "reparse"
user User name of the entry's owner. (Only on Unix)
On Unix, if the entry is a symlink, the Dictionary includes
the information of the target (except the "type" item).
On MS-Windows, it includes the information of the symlink
itself because of performance reasons.
When {expr} is omitted all entries are included.
When {expr} is given, it is evaluated to check what to do:
If {expr} results in -1 then no further entries will
be handled.
If {expr} results in 0 then this entry will not be
added to the list.
If {expr} results in 1 then this entry will be added
to the list.
The entries "." and ".." are always excluded.
Each time {expr} is evaluated |v:val| is set to a |Dictionary|
of the entry.
When {expr} is a function the entry is passed as the argument.
For example, to get a list of files ending in ".txt": >
readdirex(dirname, {e -> e.name =~ '.txt$'})
<
For example, to get a list of all files in the current
directory without sorting the individual entries: >
readdirex(dirname, '1', #{sort: 'none'})
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetDirName()->readdirex()
<
*readfile()*
readfile({fname} [, {type} [, {max}]])
Read file {fname} and return a |List|, each line of the file
as an item. Lines are broken at NL characters. Macintosh
files separated with CR will result in a single long line
(unless a NL appears somewhere).
All NUL characters are replaced with a NL character.
When {type} contains "b" binary mode is used:
- When the last line ends in a NL an extra empty list item is
added.
- No CR characters are removed.
Otherwise:
- CR characters that appear before a NL are removed.
- Whether the last line ends in a NL or not does not matter.
- When 'encoding' is Unicode any UTF-8 byte order mark is
removed from the text.
When {max} is given this specifies the maximum number of lines
to be read. Useful if you only want to check the first ten
lines of a file: >
:for line in readfile(fname, '', 10)
: if line =~ 'Date' | echo line | endif
:endfor
< When {max} is negative -{max} lines from the end of the file
are returned, or as many as there are.
When {max} is zero the result is an empty list.
Note that without {max} the whole file is read into memory.
Also note that there is no recognition of encoding. Read a
file into a buffer if you need to.
Deprecated (use |readblob()| instead): When {type} contains
"B" a |Blob| is returned with the binary data of the file
unmodified.
When the file can't be opened an error message is given and
the result is an empty list.
Also see |writefile()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetFileName()->readfile()
reduce({object}, {func} [, {initial}]) *reduce()* *E998*
{func} is called for every item in {object}, which can be a
|String|, |List| or a |Blob|. {func} is called with two
arguments: the result so far and current item. After
processing all items the result is returned. *E1132*
{initial} is the initial result. When omitted, the first item
in {object} is used and {func} is first called for the second
item. If {initial} is not given and {object} is empty no
result can be computed, an E998 error is given.
Examples: >
echo reduce([1, 3, 5], { acc, val -> acc + val })
echo reduce(['x', 'y'], { acc, val -> acc .. val }, 'a')
echo reduce(0z1122, { acc, val -> 2 * acc + val })
echo reduce('xyz', { acc, val -> acc .. ',' .. val })
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
echo mylist->reduce({ acc, val -> acc + val }, 0)
reg_executing() *reg_executing()*
Returns the single letter name of the register being executed.
Returns an empty string when no register is being executed.
See |@|.
reg_recording() *reg_recording()*
Returns the single letter name of the register being recorded.
Returns an empty string when not recording. See |q|.
reltime()
reltime({start})
reltime({start}, {end}) *reltime()*
Return an item that represents a time value. The item is a
list with items that depend on the system. In Vim 9 script
list<any> can be used.
The item can be passed to |reltimestr()| to convert it to a
string or |reltimefloat()| to convert to a Float. For
example, to see the time spent in function Work(): >
var startTime = reltime()
Work()
echo startTime->reltime()->reltimestr()
<
Without an argument reltime() returns the current time (the
representation is system-dependent, it can not be used as the
wall-clock time, see |localtime()| for that).
With one argument is returns the time passed since the time
specified in the argument.
With two arguments it returns the time passed between {start}
and {end}.
The {start} and {end} arguments must be values returned by
reltime(). If there is an error an empty List is returned in
legacy script, in Vim9 script an error is given.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetStart()->reltime()
<
{only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature}
reltimefloat({time}) *reltimefloat()*
Return a Float that represents the time value of {time}.
Example: >
let start = reltime()
call MyFunction()
let seconds = reltimefloat(reltime(start))
< See the note of reltimestr() about overhead.
Also see |profiling|.
If there is an error 0.0 is returned in legacy script, in Vim9
script an error is given.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
reltime(start)->reltimefloat()
< {only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature}
reltimestr({time}) *reltimestr()*
Return a String that represents the time value of {time}.
This is the number of seconds, a dot and the number of
microseconds. Example: >
let start = reltime()
call MyFunction()
echo reltimestr(reltime(start))
< Note that overhead for the commands will be added to the time.
The accuracy depends on the system.
Leading spaces are used to make the string align nicely. You
can use split() to remove it. >
echo split(reltimestr(reltime(start)))[0]
< Also see |profiling|.
If there is an error an empty string is returned in legacy
script, in Vim9 script an error is given.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
reltime(start)->reltimestr()
< {only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature}
*remote_expr()* *E449*
remote_expr({server}, {string} [, {idvar} [, {timeout}]])
Send the {string} to {server}. The {server} argument is a
string, also see |{server}|.
The string is sent as an expression and the result is returned
after evaluation. The result must be a String or a |List|. A
|List| is turned into a String by joining the items with a
line break in between (not at the end), like with join(expr,
"\n").
If {idvar} is present and not empty, it is taken as the name
of a variable and a {serverid} for later use with
|remote_read()| is stored there.
If {timeout} is given the read times out after this many
seconds. Otherwise a timeout of 600 seconds is used.
See also |clientserver| |RemoteReply|.
This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
{only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
Note: Any errors will cause a local error message to be issued
and the result will be the empty string.
Variables will be evaluated in the global namespace,
independent of a function currently being active. Except
when in debug mode, then local function variables and
arguments can be evaluated.
Examples: >
:echo remote_expr("gvim", "2+2")
:echo remote_expr("gvim1", "b:current_syntax")
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
ServerName()->remote_expr(expr)
remote_foreground({server}) *remote_foreground()*
Move the Vim server with the name {server} to the foreground.
The {server} argument is a string, also see |{server}|.
This works like: >
remote_expr({server}, "foreground()")
< Except that on Win32 systems the client does the work, to work
around the problem that the OS doesn't always allow the server
to bring itself to the foreground.
Note: This does not restore the window if it was minimized,
like foreground() does.
This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
ServerName()->remote_foreground()
< {only in the Win32, Motif and GTK GUI versions and the
Win32 console version}
remote_peek({serverid} [, {retvar}]) *remote_peek()*
Returns a positive number if there are available strings
from {serverid}. Copies any reply string into the variable
{retvar} if specified. {retvar} must be a string with the
name of a variable.
Returns zero if none are available.
Returns -1 if something is wrong.
See also |clientserver|.
This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
{only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
Examples: >
:let repl = ""
:echo "PEEK: " .. remote_peek(id, "repl") .. ": " .. repl
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
ServerId()->remote_peek()
remote_read({serverid}, [{timeout}]) *remote_read()*
Return the oldest available reply from {serverid} and consume
it. Unless a {timeout} in seconds is given, it blocks until a
reply is available. Returns an empty string, if a reply is
not available or on error.
See also |clientserver|.
This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
{only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
Example: >
:echo remote_read(id)
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
ServerId()->remote_read()
<
*remote_send()* *E241*
remote_send({server}, {string} [, {idvar}])
Send the {string} to {server}. The {server} argument is a
string, also see |{server}|.
The string is sent as input keys and the function returns
immediately. At the Vim server the keys are not mapped
|:map|.
If {idvar} is present, it is taken as the name of a variable
and a {serverid} for later use with remote_read() is stored
there.
See also |clientserver| |RemoteReply|.
This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
{only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
Note: Any errors will be reported in the server and may mess
up the display.
Examples: >
:echo remote_send("gvim", ":DropAndReply " .. file, "serverid") ..
\ remote_read(serverid)
:autocmd NONE RemoteReply *
\ echo remote_read(expand("<amatch>"))
:echo remote_send("gvim", ":sleep 10 | echo " ..
\ 'server2client(expand("<client>"), "HELLO")<CR>')
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
ServerName()->remote_send(keys)
<
*remote_startserver()* *E941* *E942*
remote_startserver({name})
Become the server {name}. This fails if already running as a
server, when |v:servername| is not empty.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
ServerName()->remote_startserver()
< {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
remove({list}, {idx})
remove({list}, {idx}, {end}) *remove()*
Without {end}: Remove the item at {idx} from |List| {list} and
return the item.
With {end}: Remove items from {idx} to {end} (inclusive) and
return a |List| with these items. When {idx} points to the same
item as {end} a list with one item is returned. When {end}
points to an item before {idx} this is an error.
See |list-index| for possible values of {idx} and {end}.
Returns zero on error.
Example: >
:echo "last item: " .. remove(mylist, -1)
:call remove(mylist, 0, 9)
<
Use |delete()| to remove a file.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
mylist->remove(idx)
remove({blob}, {idx})
remove({blob}, {idx}, {end})
Without {end}: Remove the byte at {idx} from |Blob| {blob} and
return the byte.
With {end}: Remove bytes from {idx} to {end} (inclusive) and
return a |Blob| with these bytes. When {idx} points to the same
byte as {end} a |Blob| with one byte is returned. When {end}
points to a byte before {idx} this is an error.
Returns zero on error.
Example: >
:echo "last byte: " .. remove(myblob, -1)
:call remove(mylist, 0, 9)
remove({dict}, {key})
Remove the entry from {dict} with key {key} and return it.
Example: >
:echo "removed " .. remove(dict, "one")
< If there is no {key} in {dict} this is an error.
Returns zero on error.
rename({from}, {to}) *rename()*
Rename the file by the name {from} to the name {to}. This
should also work to move files across file systems. The
result is a Number, which is 0 if the file was renamed
successfully, and non-zero when the renaming failed.
NOTE: If {to} exists it is overwritten without warning.
This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetOldName()->rename(newname)
repeat({expr}, {count}) *repeat()*
Repeat {expr} {count} times and return the concatenated
result. Example: >
:let separator = repeat('-', 80)
< When {count} is zero or negative the result is empty.
When {expr} is a |List| or a |Blob| the result is {expr}
concatenated {count} times. Example: >
:let longlist = repeat(['a', 'b'], 3)
< Results in ['a', 'b', 'a', 'b', 'a', 'b'].
Can also be used as a |method|: >
mylist->repeat(count)
resolve({filename}) *resolve()* *E655*
On MS-Windows, when {filename} is a shortcut (a .lnk file),
returns the path the shortcut points to in a simplified form.
When {filename} is a symbolic link or junction point, return
the full path to the target. If the target of junction is
removed, return {filename}.
On Unix, repeat resolving symbolic links in all path
components of {filename} and return the simplified result.
To cope with link cycles, resolving of symbolic links is
stopped after 100 iterations.
On other systems, return the simplified {filename}.
The simplification step is done as by |simplify()|.
resolve() keeps a leading path component specifying the
current directory (provided the result is still a relative
path name) and also keeps a trailing path separator.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetName()->resolve()
reverse({object}) *reverse()*
Reverse the order of items in {object} in-place.
{object} can be a |List| or a |Blob|.
Returns {object}.
Returns zero if {object} is not a List or a Blob.
If you want an object to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
:let revlist = reverse(copy(mylist))
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
mylist->reverse()
round({expr}) *round()*
Round off {expr} to the nearest integral value and return it
as a |Float|. If {expr} lies halfway between two integral
values, then use the larger one (away from zero).
{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|.
Examples: >
echo round(0.456)
< 0.0 >
echo round(4.5)
< 5.0 >
echo round(-4.5)
< -5.0
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Compute()->round()
rubyeval({expr}) *rubyeval()*
Evaluate Ruby expression {expr} and return its result
converted to Vim data structures.
Numbers, floats and strings are returned as they are (strings
are copied though).
Arrays are represented as Vim |List| type.
Hashes are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type.
Other objects are represented as strings resulted from their
"Object#to_s" method.
Note that in a `:def` function local variables are not visible
to {expr}.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetRubyExpr()->rubyeval()
< {only available when compiled with the |+ruby| feature}
screenattr({row}, {col}) *screenattr()*
Like |screenchar()|, but return the attribute. This is a rather
arbitrary number that can only be used to compare to the
attribute at other positions.
Returns -1 when row or col is out of range.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetRow()->screenattr(col)
screenchar({row}, {col}) *screenchar()*
The result is a Number, which is the character at position
[row, col] on the screen. This works for every possible
screen position, also status lines, window separators and the
command line. The top left position is row one, column one
The character excludes composing characters. For double-byte
encodings it may only be the first byte.
This is mainly to be used for testing.
Returns -1 when row or col is out of range.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetRow()->screenchar(col)
screenchars({row}, {col}) *screenchars()*
The result is a |List| of Numbers. The first number is the same
as what |screenchar()| returns. Further numbers are
composing characters on top of the base character.
This is mainly to be used for testing.
Returns an empty List when row or col is out of range.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetRow()->screenchars(col)
screencol() *screencol()*
The result is a Number, which is the current screen column of
the cursor. The leftmost column has number 1.
This function is mainly used for testing.
Note: Always returns the current screen column, thus if used
in a command (e.g. ":echo screencol()") it will return the
column inside the command line, which is 1 when the command is
executed. To get the cursor position in the file use one of
the following mappings: >
nnoremap <expr> GG ":echom " .. screencol() .. "\n"
nnoremap <silent> GG :echom screencol()<CR>
nnoremap GG <Cmd>echom screencol()<CR>
<
screenpos({winid}, {lnum}, {col}) *screenpos()*
The result is a Dict with the screen position of the text
character in window {winid} at buffer line {lnum} and column
{col}. {col} is a one-based byte index.
The Dict has these members:
row screen row
col first screen column
endcol last screen column
curscol cursor screen column
If the specified position is not visible, all values are zero.
The "endcol" value differs from "col" when the character
occupies more than one screen cell. E.g. for a Tab "col" can
be 1 and "endcol" can be 8.
The "curscol" value is where the cursor would be placed. For
a Tab it would be the same as "endcol", while for a double
width character it would be the same as "col".
The |conceal| feature is ignored here, the column numbers are
as if 'conceallevel' is zero. You can set the cursor to the
right position and use |screencol()| to get the value with
|conceal| taken into account.
If the position is in a closed fold the screen position of the
first character is returned, {col} is not used.
Returns an empty Dict if {winid} is invalid.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWinid()->screenpos(lnum, col)
screenrow() *screenrow()*
The result is a Number, which is the current screen row of the
cursor. The top line has number one.
This function is mainly used for testing.
Alternatively you can use |winline()|.
Note: Same restrictions as with |screencol()|.
screenstring({row}, {col}) *screenstring()*
The result is a String that contains the base character and
any composing characters at position [row, col] on the screen.
This is like |screenchars()| but returning a String with the
characters.
This is mainly to be used for testing.
Returns an empty String when row or col is out of range.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetRow()->screenstring(col)
<
*search()*
search({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout} [, {skip}]]]])
Search for regexp pattern {pattern}. The search starts at the
cursor position (you can use |cursor()| to set it).
When a match has been found its line number is returned.
If there is no match a 0 is returned and the cursor doesn't
move. No error message is given.
{flags} is a String, which can contain these character flags:
'b' search Backward instead of forward
'c' accept a match at the Cursor position
'e' move to the End of the match
'n' do Not move the cursor
'p' return number of matching sub-Pattern (see below)
's' Set the ' mark at the previous location of the cursor
'w' Wrap around the end of the file
'W' don't Wrap around the end of the file
'z' start searching at the cursor column instead of zero
If neither 'w' or 'W' is given, the 'wrapscan' option applies.
If the 's' flag is supplied, the ' mark is set, only if the
cursor is moved. The 's' flag cannot be combined with the 'n'
flag.
'ignorecase', 'smartcase' and 'magic' are used.
When the 'z' flag is not given, forward searching always
starts in column zero and then matches before the cursor are
skipped. When the 'c' flag is present in 'cpo' the next
search starts after the match. Without the 'c' flag the next
search starts one column after the start of the match. This
matters for overlapping matches. See |cpo-c|. You can also
insert "\ze" to change where the match ends, see |/\ze|.
When searching backwards and the 'z' flag is given then the
search starts in column zero, thus no match in the current
line will be found (unless wrapping around the end of the
file).
When the {stopline} argument is given then the search stops
after searching this line. This is useful to restrict the
search to a range of lines. Examples: >
let match = search('(', 'b', line("w0"))
let end = search('END', '', line("w$"))
< When {stopline} is used and it is not zero this also implies
that the search does not wrap around the end of the file.
A zero value is equal to not giving the argument.
*E1285* *E1286* *E1287* *E1288* *E1289*
When the {timeout} argument is given the search stops when
more than this many milliseconds have passed. Thus when
{timeout} is 500 the search stops after half a second.
The value must not be negative. A zero value is like not
giving the argument.
{only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature}
If the {skip} expression is given it is evaluated with the
cursor positioned on the start of a match. If it evaluates to
non-zero this match is skipped. This can be used, for
example, to skip a match in a comment or a string.
{skip} can be a string, which is evaluated as an expression, a
function reference or a lambda.
When {skip} is omitted or empty, every match is accepted.
When evaluating {skip} causes an error the search is aborted
and -1 returned.
*search()-sub-match*
With the 'p' flag the returned value is one more than the
first sub-match in \(\). One if none of them matched but the
whole pattern did match.
To get the column number too use |searchpos()|.
The cursor will be positioned at the match, unless the 'n'
flag is used.
Example (goes over all files in the argument list): >
:let n = 1
:while n <= argc() " loop over all files in arglist
: exe "argument " .. n
: " start at the last char in the file and wrap for the
: " first search to find match at start of file
: normal G$
: let flags = "w"
: while search("foo", flags) > 0
: s/foo/bar/g
: let flags = "W"
: endwhile
: update " write the file if modified
: let n = n + 1
:endwhile
<
Example for using some flags: >
:echo search('\<if\|\(else\)\|\(endif\)', 'ncpe')
< This will search for the keywords "if", "else", and "endif"
under or after the cursor. Because of the 'p' flag, it
returns 1, 2, or 3 depending on which keyword is found, or 0
if the search fails. With the cursor on the first word of the
line:
if (foo == 0) | let foo = foo + 1 | endif ~
the function returns 1. Without the 'c' flag, the function
finds the "endif" and returns 3. The same thing happens
without the 'e' flag if the cursor is on the "f" of "if".
The 'n' flag tells the function not to move the cursor.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetPattern()->search()
searchcount([{options}]) *searchcount()*
Get or update the last search count, like what is displayed
without the "S" flag in 'shortmess'. This works even if
'shortmess' does contain the "S" flag.
This returns a |Dictionary|. The dictionary is empty if the
previous pattern was not set and "pattern" was not specified.
key type meaning ~
current |Number| current position of match;
0 if the cursor position is
before the first match
exact_match |Boolean| 1 if "current" is matched on
"pos", otherwise 0
total |Number| total count of matches found
incomplete |Number| 0: search was fully completed
1: recomputing was timed out
2: max count exceeded
For {options} see further down.
To get the last search count when |n| or |N| was pressed, call
this function with `recompute: 0` . This sometimes returns
wrong information because |n| and |N|'s maximum count is 99.
If it exceeded 99 the result must be max count + 1 (100). If
you want to get correct information, specify `recompute: 1`: >
" result == maxcount + 1 (100) when many matches
let result = searchcount(#{recompute: 0})
" Below returns correct result (recompute defaults
" to 1)
let result = searchcount()
<
The function is useful to add the count to 'statusline': >
function! LastSearchCount() abort
let result = searchcount(#{recompute: 0})
if empty(result)
return ''
endif
if result.incomplete ==# 1 " timed out
return printf(' /%s [?/??]', @/)
elseif result.incomplete ==# 2 " max count exceeded
if result.total > result.maxcount &&
\ result.current > result.maxcount
return printf(' /%s [>%d/>%d]', @/,
\ result.current, result.total)
elseif result.total > result.maxcount
return printf(' /%s [%d/>%d]', @/,
\ result.current, result.total)
endif
endif
return printf(' /%s [%d/%d]', @/,
\ result.current, result.total)
endfunction
let &statusline ..= '%{LastSearchCount()}'
" Or if you want to show the count only when
" 'hlsearch' was on
" let &statusline ..=
" \ '%{v:hlsearch ? LastSearchCount() : ""}'
<
You can also update the search count, which can be useful in a
|CursorMoved| or |CursorMovedI| autocommand: >
autocmd CursorMoved,CursorMovedI *
\ let s:searchcount_timer = timer_start(
\ 200, function('s:update_searchcount'))
function! s:update_searchcount(timer) abort
if a:timer ==# s:searchcount_timer
call searchcount(#{
\ recompute: 1, maxcount: 0, timeout: 100})
redrawstatus
endif
endfunction
<
This can also be used to count matched texts with specified
pattern in the current buffer using "pattern": >
" Count '\<foo\>' in this buffer
" (Note that it also updates search count)
let result = searchcount(#{pattern: '\<foo\>'})
" To restore old search count by old pattern,
" search again
call searchcount()
<
{options} must be a |Dictionary|. It can contain:
key type meaning ~
recompute |Boolean| if |TRUE|, recompute the count
like |n| or |N| was executed.
otherwise returns the last
computed result (when |n| or
|N| was used when "S" is not
in 'shortmess', or this
function was called).
(default: |TRUE|)
pattern |String| recompute if this was given
and different with |@/|.
this works as same as the
below command is executed
before calling this function >
let @/ = pattern
< (default: |@/|)
timeout |Number| 0 or negative number is no
timeout. timeout milliseconds
for recomputing the result
(default: 0)
maxcount |Number| 0 or negative number is no
limit. max count of matched
text while recomputing the
result. if search exceeded
total count, "total" value
becomes `maxcount + 1`
(default: 99)
pos |List| `[lnum, col, off]` value
when recomputing the result.
this changes "current" result
value. see |cursor()|,
|getpos()|
(default: cursor's position)
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetSearchOpts()->searchcount()
<
searchdecl({name} [, {global} [, {thisblock}]]) *searchdecl()*
Search for the declaration of {name}.
With a non-zero {global} argument it works like |gD|, find
first match in the file. Otherwise it works like |gd|, find
first match in the function.
With a non-zero {thisblock} argument matches in a {} block
that ends before the cursor position are ignored. Avoids
finding variable declarations only valid in another scope.
Moves the cursor to the found match.
Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure.
Example: >
if searchdecl('myvar') == 0
echo getline('.')
endif
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetName()->searchdecl()
<
*searchpair()*
searchpair({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip}
[, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]])
Search for the match of a nested start-end pair. This can be
used to find the "endif" that matches an "if", while other
if/endif pairs in between are ignored.
The search starts at the cursor. The default is to search
forward, include 'b' in {flags} to search backward.
If a match is found, the cursor is positioned at it and the
line number is returned. If no match is found 0 or -1 is
returned and the cursor doesn't move. No error message is
given.
{start}, {middle} and {end} are patterns, see |pattern|. They
must not contain \( \) pairs. Use of \%( \) is allowed. When
{middle} is not empty, it is found when searching from either
direction, but only when not in a nested start-end pair. A
typical use is: >
searchpair('\<if\>', '\<else\>', '\<endif\>')
< By leaving {middle} empty the "else" is skipped.
{flags} 'b', 'c', 'n', 's', 'w' and 'W' are used like with
|search()|. Additionally:
'r' Repeat until no more matches found; will find the
outer pair. Implies the 'W' flag.
'm' Return number of matches instead of line number with
the match; will be > 1 when 'r' is used.
Note: it's nearly always a good idea to use the 'W' flag, to
avoid wrapping around the end of the file.
When a match for {start}, {middle} or {end} is found, the
{skip} expression is evaluated with the cursor positioned on
the start of the match. It should return non-zero if this
match is to be skipped. E.g., because it is inside a comment
or a string.
When {skip} is omitted or empty, every match is accepted.
When evaluating {skip} causes an error the search is aborted
and -1 returned.
{skip} can be a string, a lambda, a funcref or a partial.
Anything else makes the function fail.
In a `:def` function when the {skip} argument is a string
constant it is compiled into instructions.
For {stopline} and {timeout} see |search()|.
The value of 'ignorecase' is used. 'magic' is ignored, the
patterns are used like it's on.
The search starts exactly at the cursor. A match with
{start}, {middle} or {end} at the next character, in the
direction of searching, is the first one found. Example: >
if 1
if 2
endif 2
endif 1
< When starting at the "if 2", with the cursor on the "i", and
searching forwards, the "endif 2" is found. When starting on
the character just before the "if 2", the "endif 1" will be
found. That's because the "if 2" will be found first, and
then this is considered to be a nested if/endif from "if 2" to
"endif 2".
When searching backwards and {end} is more than one character,
it may be useful to put "\zs" at the end of the pattern, so
that when the cursor is inside a match with the end it finds
the matching start.
Example, to find the "endif" command in a Vim script: >
:echo searchpair('\<if\>', '\<el\%[seif]\>', '\<en\%[dif]\>', 'W',
\ 'getline(".") =~ "^\\s*\""')
< The cursor must be at or after the "if" for which a match is
to be found. Note that single-quote strings are used to avoid
having to double the backslashes. The skip expression only
catches comments at the start of a line, not after a command.
Also, a word "en" or "if" halfway a line is considered a
match.
Another example, to search for the matching "{" of a "}": >
:echo searchpair('{', '', '}', 'bW')
< This works when the cursor is at or before the "}" for which a
match is to be found. To reject matches that syntax
highlighting recognized as strings: >
:echo searchpair('{', '', '}', 'bW',
\ 'synIDattr(synID(line("."), col("."), 0), "name") =~? "string"')
<
*searchpairpos()*
searchpairpos({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip}
[, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]])
Same as |searchpair()|, but returns a |List| with the line and
column position of the match. The first element of the |List|
is the line number and the second element is the byte index of
the column position of the match. If no match is found,
returns [0, 0]. >
:let [lnum,col] = searchpairpos('{', '', '}', 'n')
<
See |match-parens| for a bigger and more useful example.
*searchpos()*
searchpos({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout} [, {skip}]]]])
Same as |search()|, but returns a |List| with the line and
column position of the match. The first element of the |List|
is the line number and the second element is the byte index of
the column position of the match. If no match is found,
returns [0, 0].
Example: >
:let [lnum, col] = searchpos('mypattern', 'n')
< When the 'p' flag is given then there is an extra item with
the sub-pattern match number |search()-sub-match|. Example: >
:let [lnum, col, submatch] = searchpos('\(\l\)\|\(\u\)', 'np')
< In this example "submatch" is 2 when a lowercase letter is
found |/\l|, 3 when an uppercase letter is found |/\u|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetPattern()->searchpos()
server2client({clientid}, {string}) *server2client()*
Send a reply string to {clientid}. The most recent {clientid}
that sent a string can be retrieved with expand("<client>").
{only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
Returns zero for success, -1 for failure.
Note:
This id has to be stored before the next command can be
received. I.e. before returning from the received command and
before calling any commands that waits for input.
See also |clientserver|.
Example: >
:echo server2client(expand("<client>"), "HELLO")
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetClientId()->server2client(string)
<
serverlist() *serverlist()*
Return a list of available server names, one per line.
When there are no servers or the information is not available
an empty string is returned. See also |clientserver|.
{only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
Example: >
:echo serverlist()
<
setbufline({buf}, {lnum}, {text}) *setbufline()*
Set line {lnum} to {text} in buffer {buf}. This works like
|setline()| for the specified buffer.
This function works only for loaded buffers. First call
|bufload()| if needed.
To insert lines use |appendbufline()|.
Any text properties in {lnum} are cleared.
{text} can be a string to set one line, or a List of strings
to set multiple lines. If the List extends below the last
line then those lines are added. If the List is empty then
nothing is changed and zero is returned.
For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above.
{lnum} is used like with |setline()|.
Use "$" to refer to the last line in buffer {buf}.
When {lnum} is just below the last line the {text} will be
added below the last line.
When {buf} is not a valid buffer, the buffer is not loaded or
{lnum} is not valid then 1 is returned. In |Vim9| script an
error is given.
On success 0 is returned.
Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
third argument: >
GetText()->setbufline(buf, lnum)
setbufvar({buf}, {varname}, {val}) *setbufvar()*
Set option or local variable {varname} in buffer {buf} to
{val}.
This also works for a global or local window option, but it
doesn't work for a global or local window variable.
For a local window option the global value is unchanged.
For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above.
The {varname} argument is a string.
Note that the variable name without "b:" must be used.
Examples: >
:call setbufvar(1, "&mod", 1)
:call setbufvar("todo", "myvar", "foobar")
< This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
third argument: >
GetValue()->setbufvar(buf, varname)
setcellwidths({list}) *setcellwidths()*
Specify overrides for cell widths of character ranges. This
tells Vim how wide characters are when displayed in the
terminal, counted in screen cells. The values override
'ambiwidth'. Example: >
call setcellwidths([
\ [0x111, 0x111, 1],
\ [0x2194, 0x2199, 2],
\ ])
< The {list} argument is a List of Lists with each three
numbers: [{low}, {high}, {width}]. *E1109* *E1110*
{low} and {high} can be the same, in which case this refers to
one character. Otherwise it is the range of characters from
{low} to {high} (inclusive). *E1111* *E1114*
Only characters with value 0x80 and higher can be used.
{width} must be either 1 or 2, indicating the character width
in screen cells. *E1112*
An error is given if the argument is invalid, also when a
range overlaps with another. *E1113*
If the new value causes 'fillchars' or 'listchars' to become
invalid it is rejected and an error is given.
To clear the overrides pass an empty {list}: >
setcellwidths([]);
< You can use the script $VIMRUNTIME/tools/emoji_list.vim to see
the effect for known emoji characters. Move the cursor
through the text to check if the cell widths of your terminal
match with what Vim knows about each emoji. If it doesn't
look right you need to adjust the {list} argument.
setcharpos({expr}, {list}) *setcharpos()*
Same as |setpos()| but uses the specified column number as the
character index instead of the byte index in the line.
Example:
With the text "여보세요" in line 8: >
call setcharpos('.', [0, 8, 4, 0])
< positions the cursor on the fourth character '요'. >
call setpos('.', [0, 8, 4, 0])
< positions the cursor on the second character '보'.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetPosition()->setcharpos('.')
setcharsearch({dict}) *setcharsearch()*
Set the current character search information to {dict},
which contains one or more of the following entries:
char character which will be used for a subsequent
|,| or |;| command; an empty string clears the
character search
forward direction of character search; 1 for forward,
0 for backward
until type of character search; 1 for a |t| or |T|
character search, 0 for an |f| or |F|
character search
This can be useful to save/restore a user's character search
from a script: >
:let prevsearch = getcharsearch()
:" Perform a command which clobbers user's search
:call setcharsearch(prevsearch)
< Also see |getcharsearch()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
SavedSearch()->setcharsearch()
setcmdline({str} [, {pos}]) *setcmdline()*
Set the command line to {str} and set the cursor position to
{pos}.
If {pos} is omitted, the cursor is positioned after the text.
Returns 0 when successful, 1 when not editing the command
line.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetText()->setcmdline()
setcmdpos({pos}) *setcmdpos()*
Set the cursor position in the command line to byte position
{pos}. The first position is 1.
Use |getcmdpos()| to obtain the current position.
Only works while editing the command line, thus you must use
|c_CTRL-\_e|, |c_CTRL-R_=| or |c_CTRL-R_CTRL-R| with '='. For
|c_CTRL-\_e| and |c_CTRL-R_CTRL-R| with '=' the position is
set after the command line is set to the expression. For
|c_CTRL-R_=| it is set after evaluating the expression but
before inserting the resulting text.
When the number is too big the cursor is put at the end of the
line. A number smaller than one has undefined results.
Returns 0 when successful, 1 when not editing the command
line.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetPos()->setcmdpos()
setcursorcharpos({lnum}, {col} [, {off}]) *setcursorcharpos()*
setcursorcharpos({list})
Same as |cursor()| but uses the specified column number as the
character index instead of the byte index in the line.
Example:
With the text "여보세요" in line 4: >
call setcursorcharpos(4, 3)
< positions the cursor on the third character '세'. >
call cursor(4, 3)
< positions the cursor on the first character '여'.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetCursorPos()->setcursorcharpos()
setenv({name}, {val}) *setenv()*
Set environment variable {name} to {val}. Example: >
call setenv('HOME', '/home/myhome')
< When {val} is |v:null| the environment variable is deleted.
See also |expr-env|.
Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
second argument: >
GetPath()->setenv('PATH')
setfperm({fname}, {mode}) *setfperm()* *chmod*
Set the file permissions for {fname} to {mode}.
{mode} must be a string with 9 characters. It is of the form
"rwxrwxrwx", where each group of "rwx" flags represent, in
turn, the permissions of the owner of the file, the group the
file belongs to, and other users. A '-' character means the
permission is off, any other character means on. Multi-byte
characters are not supported.
For example "rw-r-----" means read-write for the user,
readable by the group, not accessible by others. "xx-x-----"
would do the same thing.
Returns non-zero for success, zero for failure.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetFilename()->setfperm(mode)
<
To read permissions see |getfperm()|.
setline({lnum}, {text}) *setline()*
Set line {lnum} of the current buffer to {text}. To insert
lines use |append()|. To set lines in another buffer use
|setbufline()|. Any text properties in {lnum} are cleared.
{lnum} is used like with |getline()|.
When {lnum} is just below the last line the {text} will be
added below the last line.
{text} can be any type or a List of any type, each item is
converted to a String. When {text} is an empty List then
nothing is changed and FALSE is returned.
If this succeeds, FALSE is returned. If this fails (most likely
because {lnum} is invalid) TRUE is returned.
In |Vim9| script an error is given if {lnum} is invalid.
Example: >
:call setline(5, strftime("%c"))
< When {text} is a |List| then line {lnum} and following lines
will be set to the items in the list. Example: >
:call setline(5, ['aaa', 'bbb', 'ccc'])
< This is equivalent to: >
:for [n, l] in [[5, 'aaa'], [6, 'bbb'], [7, 'ccc']]
: call setline(n, l)
:endfor
< Note: The '[ and '] marks are not set.
Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
second argument: >
GetText()->setline(lnum)
setloclist({nr}, {list} [, {action} [, {what}]]) *setloclist()*
Create or replace or add to the location list for window {nr}.
{nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
When {nr} is zero the current window is used.
For a location list window, the displayed location list is
modified. For an invalid window number {nr}, -1 is returned.
Otherwise, same as |setqflist()|.
Also see |location-list|.
For {action} see |setqflist-action|.
If the optional {what} dictionary argument is supplied, then
only the items listed in {what} are set. Refer to |setqflist()|
for the list of supported keys in {what}.
Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
second argument: >
GetLoclist()->setloclist(winnr)
setmatches({list} [, {win}]) *setmatches()*
Restores a list of matches saved by |getmatches()| for the
current window. Returns 0 if successful, otherwise -1. All
current matches are cleared before the list is restored. See
example for |getmatches()|.
If {win} is specified, use the window with this number or
window ID instead of the current window.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetMatches()->setmatches()
<
*setpos()*
setpos({expr}, {list})
Set the position for String {expr}. Possible values:
. the cursor
'x mark x
{list} must be a |List| with four or five numbers:
[bufnum, lnum, col, off]
[bufnum, lnum, col, off, curswant]
"bufnum" is the buffer number. Zero can be used for the
current buffer. When setting an uppercase mark "bufnum" is
used for the mark position. For other marks it specifies the
buffer to set the mark in. You can use the |bufnr()| function
to turn a file name into a buffer number.
For setting the cursor and the ' mark "bufnum" is ignored,
since these are associated with a window, not a buffer.
Does not change the jumplist.
"lnum" and "col" are the position in the buffer. The first
column is 1. Use a zero "lnum" to delete a mark. If "col" is
smaller than 1 then 1 is used. To use the character count
instead of the byte count, use |setcharpos()|.
The "off" number is only used when 'virtualedit' is set. Then
it is the offset in screen columns from the start of the
character. E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last
character.
The "curswant" number is only used when setting the cursor
position. It sets the preferred column for when moving the
cursor vertically. When the "curswant" number is missing the
preferred column is not set. When it is present and setting a
mark position it is not used.
Note that for '< and '> changing the line number may result in
the marks to be effectively be swapped, so that '< is always
before '>.
Returns 0 when the position could be set, -1 otherwise.
An error message is given if {expr} is invalid.
Also see |setcharpos()|, |getpos()| and |getcurpos()|.
This does not restore the preferred column for moving
vertically; if you set the cursor position with this, |j| and
|k| motions will jump to previous columns! Use |cursor()| to
also set the preferred column. Also see the "curswant" key in
|winrestview()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetPosition()->setpos('.')
setqflist({list} [, {action} [, {what}]]) *setqflist()*
Create or replace or add to the quickfix list.
If the optional {what} dictionary argument is supplied, then
only the items listed in {what} are set. The first {list}
argument is ignored. See below for the supported items in
{what}.
*setqflist-what*
When {what} is not present, the items in {list} are used. Each
item must be a dictionary. Non-dictionary items in {list} are
ignored. Each dictionary item can contain the following
entries:
bufnr buffer number; must be the number of a valid
buffer
filename name of a file; only used when "bufnr" is not
present or it is invalid.
module name of a module; if given it will be used in
quickfix error window instead of the filename.
lnum line number in the file
end_lnum end of lines, if the item spans multiple lines
pattern search pattern used to locate the error
col column number
vcol when non-zero: "col" is visual column
when zero: "col" is byte index
end_col end column, if the item spans multiple columns
nr error number
text description of the error
type single-character error type, 'E', 'W', etc.
valid recognized error message
The "col", "vcol", "nr", "type" and "text" entries are
optional. Either "lnum" or "pattern" entry can be used to
locate a matching error line.
If the "filename" and "bufnr" entries are not present or
neither the "lnum" or "pattern" entries are present, then the
item will not be handled as an error line.
If both "pattern" and "lnum" are present then "pattern" will
be used.
If the "valid" entry is not supplied, then the valid flag is
set when "bufnr" is a valid buffer or "filename" exists.
If you supply an empty {list}, the quickfix list will be
cleared.
Note that the list is not exactly the same as what
|getqflist()| returns.
{action} values: *setqflist-action* *E927*
'a' The items from {list} are added to the existing
quickfix list. If there is no existing list, then a
new list is created.
'r' The items from the current quickfix list are replaced
with the items from {list}. This can also be used to
clear the list: >
:call setqflist([], 'r')
<
'f' All the quickfix lists in the quickfix stack are
freed.
If {action} is not present or is set to ' ', then a new list
is created. The new quickfix list is added after the current
quickfix list in the stack and all the following lists are
freed. To add a new quickfix list at the end of the stack,
set "nr" in {what} to "$".
The following items can be specified in dictionary {what}:
context quickfix list context. See |quickfix-context|
efm errorformat to use when parsing text from
"lines". If this is not present, then the
'errorformat' option value is used.
See |quickfix-parse|
id quickfix list identifier |quickfix-ID|
idx index of the current entry in the quickfix
list specified by 'id' or 'nr'. If set to '$',
then the last entry in the list is set as the
current entry. See |quickfix-index|
items list of quickfix entries. Same as the {list}
argument.
lines use 'errorformat' to parse a list of lines and
add the resulting entries to the quickfix list
{nr} or {id}. Only a |List| value is supported.
See |quickfix-parse|
nr list number in the quickfix stack; zero
means the current quickfix list and "$" means
the last quickfix list.
quickfixtextfunc
function to get the text to display in the
quickfix window. The value can be the name of
a function or a funcref or a lambda. Refer to
|quickfix-window-function| for an explanation
of how to write the function and an example.
title quickfix list title text. See |quickfix-title|
Unsupported keys in {what} are ignored.
If the "nr" item is not present, then the current quickfix list
is modified. When creating a new quickfix list, "nr" can be
set to a value one greater than the quickfix stack size.
When modifying a quickfix list, to guarantee that the correct
list is modified, "id" should be used instead of "nr" to
specify the list.
Examples (See also |setqflist-examples|): >
:call setqflist([], 'r', {'title': 'My search'})
:call setqflist([], 'r', {'nr': 2, 'title': 'Errors'})
:call setqflist([], 'a', {'id':qfid, 'lines':["F1:10:L10"]})
<
Returns zero for success, -1 for failure.
This function can be used to create a quickfix list
independent of the 'errorformat' setting. Use a command like
`:cc 1` to jump to the first position.
Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
second argument: >
GetErrorlist()->setqflist()
<
*setreg()*
setreg({regname}, {value} [, {options}])
Set the register {regname} to {value}.
If {regname} is "" or "@", the unnamed register '"' is used.
The {regname} argument is a string. In |Vim9-script|
{regname} must be one character.
{value} may be any value returned by |getreg()| or
|getreginfo()|, including a |List| or |Dict|.
If {options} contains "a" or {regname} is upper case,
then the value is appended.
{options} can also contain a register type specification:
"c" or "v" |characterwise| mode
"l" or "V" |linewise| mode
"b" or "<CTRL-V>" |blockwise-visual| mode
If a number immediately follows "b" or "<CTRL-V>" then this is
used as the width of the selection - if it is not specified
then the width of the block is set to the number of characters
in the longest line (counting a <Tab> as 1 character).
If {options} contains no register settings, then the default
is to use character mode unless {value} ends in a <NL> for
string {value} and linewise mode for list {value}. Blockwise
mode is never selected automatically.
Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure.
*E883*
Note: you may not use |List| containing more than one item to
set search and expression registers. Lists containing no
items act like empty strings.
Examples: >
:call setreg(v:register, @*)
:call setreg('*', @%, 'ac')
:call setreg('a', "1\n2\n3", 'b5')
:call setreg('"', { 'points_to': 'a'})
< This example shows using the functions to save and restore a
register: >
:let var_a = getreginfo()
:call setreg('a', var_a)
< or: >
:let var_a = getreg('a', 1, 1)
:let var_amode = getregtype('a')
....
:call setreg('a', var_a, var_amode)
< Note: you may not reliably restore register value
without using the third argument to |getreg()| as without it
newlines are represented as newlines AND Nul bytes are
represented as newlines as well, see |NL-used-for-Nul|.
You can also change the type of a register by appending
nothing: >
:call setreg('a', '', 'al')
< Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
second argument: >
GetText()->setreg('a')
settabvar({tabnr}, {varname}, {val}) *settabvar()*
Set tab-local variable {varname} to {val} in tab page {tabnr}.
|t:var|
The {varname} argument is a string.
Note that autocommands are blocked, side effects may not be
triggered, e.g. when setting 'filetype'.
Note that the variable name without "t:" must be used.
Tabs are numbered starting with one.
This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
third argument: >
GetValue()->settabvar(tab, name)
settabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}, {val}) *settabwinvar()*
Set option or local variable {varname} in window {winnr} to
{val}.
Tabs are numbered starting with one. For the current tabpage
use |setwinvar()|.
{winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
When {winnr} is zero the current window is used.
Note that autocommands are blocked, side effects may not be
triggered, e.g. when setting 'filetype' or 'syntax'.
This also works for a global or local buffer option, but it
doesn't work for a global or local buffer variable.
For a local buffer option the global value is unchanged.
Note that the variable name without "w:" must be used.
Examples: >
:call settabwinvar(1, 1, "&list", 0)
:call settabwinvar(3, 2, "myvar", "foobar")
< This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
fourth argument: >
GetValue()->settabwinvar(tab, winnr, name)
settagstack({nr}, {dict} [, {action}]) *settagstack()*
Modify the tag stack of the window {nr} using {dict}.
{nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
For a list of supported items in {dict}, refer to
|gettagstack()|. "curidx" takes effect before changing the tag
stack.
*E962*
How the tag stack is modified depends on the {action}
argument:
- If {action} is not present or is set to 'r', then the tag
stack is replaced.
- If {action} is set to 'a', then new entries from {dict} are
pushed (added) onto the tag stack.
- If {action} is set to 't', then all the entries from the
current entry in the tag stack or "curidx" in {dict} are
removed and then new entries are pushed to the stack.
The current index is set to one after the length of the tag
stack after the modification.
Returns zero for success, -1 for failure.
Examples (for more examples see |tagstack-examples|):
Empty the tag stack of window 3: >
call settagstack(3, {'items' : []})
< Save and restore the tag stack: >
let stack = gettagstack(1003)
" do something else
call settagstack(1003, stack)
unlet stack
<
Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
second argument: >
GetStack()->settagstack(winnr)
setwinvar({winnr}, {varname}, {val}) *setwinvar()*
Like |settabwinvar()| for the current tab page.
Examples: >
:call setwinvar(1, "&list", 0)
:call setwinvar(2, "myvar", "foobar")
< Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
third argument: >
GetValue()->setwinvar(winnr, name)
sha256({string}) *sha256()*
Returns a String with 64 hex characters, which is the SHA256
checksum of {string}.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetText()->sha256()
< {only available when compiled with the |+cryptv| feature}
shellescape({string} [, {special}]) *shellescape()*
Escape {string} for use as a shell command argument.
When the 'shell' contains powershell (MS-Windows) or pwsh
(MS-Windows, Linux, and macOS) then it will enclose {string}
in single quotes and will double up all internal single
quotes.
On MS-Windows, when 'shellslash' is not set, it will enclose
{string} in double quotes and double all double quotes within
{string}.
Otherwise it will enclose {string} in single quotes and
replace all "'" with "'\''".
When the {special} argument is present and it's a non-zero
Number or a non-empty String (|non-zero-arg|), then special
items such as "!", "%", "#" and "<cword>" will be preceded by
a backslash. This backslash will be removed again by the |:!|
command.
The "!" character will be escaped (again with a |non-zero-arg|
{special}) when 'shell' contains "csh" in the tail. That is
because for csh and tcsh "!" is used for history replacement
even when inside single quotes.
With a |non-zero-arg| {special} the <NL> character is also
escaped. When 'shell' containing "csh" in the tail it's
escaped a second time.
The "\" character will be escaped when 'shell' contains "fish"
in the tail. That is because for fish "\" is used as an escape
character inside single quotes.
Example of use with a |:!| command: >
:exe '!dir ' .. shellescape(expand('<cfile>'), 1)
< This results in a directory listing for the file under the
cursor. Example of use with |system()|: >
:call system("chmod +w -- " .. shellescape(expand("%")))
< See also |::S|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetCommand()->shellescape()
shiftwidth([{col}]) *shiftwidth()*
Returns the effective value of 'shiftwidth'. This is the
'shiftwidth' value unless it is zero, in which case it is the
'tabstop' value. This function was introduced with patch
7.3.694 in 2012, everybody should have it by now (however it
did not allow for the optional {col} argument until 8.1.542).
When there is one argument {col} this is used as column number
for which to return the 'shiftwidth' value. This matters for the
'vartabstop' feature. If the 'vartabstop' setting is enabled and
no {col} argument is given, column 1 will be assumed.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetColumn()->shiftwidth()
sign_ functions are documented here: |sign-functions-details|
simplify({filename}) *simplify()*
Simplify the file name as much as possible without changing
the meaning. Shortcuts (on MS-Windows) or symbolic links (on
Unix) are not resolved. If the first path component in
{filename} designates the current directory, this will be
valid for the result as well. A trailing path separator is
not removed either. On Unix "//path" is unchanged, but
"///path" is simplified to "/path" (this follows the Posix
standard).
Example: >
simplify("./dir/.././/file/") == "./file/"
< Note: The combination "dir/.." is only removed if "dir" is
a searchable directory or does not exist. On Unix, it is also
removed when "dir" is a symbolic link within the same
directory. In order to resolve all the involved symbolic
links before simplifying the path name, use |resolve()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetName()->simplify()
sin({expr}) *sin()*
Return the sine of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float|.
{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|.
Examples: >
:echo sin(100)
< -0.506366 >
:echo sin(-4.01)
< 0.763301
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Compute()->sin()
sinh({expr}) *sinh()*
Return the hyperbolic sine of {expr} as a |Float| in the range
[-inf, inf].
{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|.
Examples: >
:echo sinh(0.5)
< 0.521095 >
:echo sinh(-0.9)
< -1.026517
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Compute()->sinh()
slice({expr}, {start} [, {end}]) *slice()*
Similar to using a |slice| "expr[start : end]", but "end" is
used exclusive. And for a string the indexes are used as
character indexes instead of byte indexes, like in
|vim9script|. Also, composing characters are not counted.
When {end} is omitted the slice continues to the last item.
When {end} is -1 the last item is omitted.
Returns an empty value if {start} or {end} are invalid.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetList()->slice(offset)
sort({list} [, {how} [, {dict}]]) *sort()* *E702*
Sort the items in {list} in-place. Returns {list}.
If you want a list to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
:let sortedlist = sort(copy(mylist))
< When {how} is omitted or is a string, then sort() uses the
string representation of each item to sort on. Numbers sort
after Strings, |Lists| after Numbers. For sorting text in the
current buffer use |:sort|.
When {how} is given and it is 'i' then case is ignored.
In legacy script, for backwards compatibility, the value one
can be used to ignore case. Zero means to not ignore case.
When {how} is given and it is 'l' then the current collation
locale is used for ordering. Implementation details: strcoll()
is used to compare strings. See |:language| check or set the
collation locale. |v:collate| can also be used to check the
current locale. Sorting using the locale typically ignores
case. Example: >
" ö is sorted similarly to o with English locale.
:language collate en_US.UTF8
:echo sort(['n', 'o', 'O', 'ö', 'p', 'z'], 'l')
< ['n', 'o', 'O', 'ö', 'p', 'z'] ~
>
" ö is sorted after z with Swedish locale.
:language collate sv_SE.UTF8
:echo sort(['n', 'o', 'O', 'ö', 'p', 'z'], 'l')
< ['n', 'o', 'O', 'p', 'z', 'ö'] ~
This does not work properly on Mac.
When {how} is given and it is 'n' then all items will be
sorted numerical (Implementation detail: this uses the
strtod() function to parse numbers, Strings, Lists, Dicts and
Funcrefs will be considered as being 0).
When {how} is given and it is 'N' then all items will be
sorted numerical. This is like 'n' but a string containing
digits will be used as the number they represent.
When {how} is given and it is 'f' then all items will be
sorted numerical. All values must be a Number or a Float.
When {how} is a |Funcref| or a function name, this function
is called to compare items. The function is invoked with two
items as argument and must return zero if they are equal, 1 or
bigger if the first one sorts after the second one, -1 or
smaller if the first one sorts before the second one.
{dict} is for functions with the "dict" attribute. It will be
used to set the local variable "self". |Dictionary-function|
The sort is stable, items which compare equal (as number or as
string) will keep their relative position. E.g., when sorting
on numbers, text strings will sort next to each other, in the
same order as they were originally.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
mylist->sort()
< Also see |uniq()|.
Example: >
func MyCompare(i1, i2)
return a:i1 == a:i2 ? 0 : a:i1 > a:i2 ? 1 : -1
endfunc
eval mylist->sort("MyCompare")
< A shorter compare version for this specific simple case, which
ignores overflow: >
func MyCompare(i1, i2)
return a:i1 - a:i2
endfunc
< For a simple expression you can use a lambda: >
eval mylist->sort({i1, i2 -> i1 - i2})
<
sound_clear() *sound_clear()*
Stop playing all sounds.
On some Linux systems you may need the libcanberra-pulse
package, otherwise sound may not stop.
{only available when compiled with the |+sound| feature}
*sound_playevent()*
sound_playevent({name} [, {callback}])
Play a sound identified by {name}. Which event names are
supported depends on the system. Often the XDG sound names
are used. On Ubuntu they may be found in
/usr/share/sounds/freedesktop/stereo. Example: >
call sound_playevent('bell')
< On MS-Windows, {name} can be SystemAsterisk, SystemDefault,
SystemExclamation, SystemExit, SystemHand, SystemQuestion,
SystemStart, SystemWelcome, etc.
On macOS, {name} refers to files located in
/System/Library/Sounds (e.g. "Tink"). It will also work for
custom installed sounds in folders like ~/Library/Sounds.
When {callback} is specified it is invoked when the sound is
finished. The first argument is the sound ID, the second
argument is the status:
0 sound was played to the end
1 sound was interrupted
2 error occurred after sound started
Example: >
func Callback(id, status)
echomsg "sound " .. a:id .. " finished with " .. a:status
endfunc
call sound_playevent('bell', 'Callback')
< MS-Windows: {callback} doesn't work for this function.
Returns the sound ID, which can be passed to `sound_stop()`.
Returns zero if the sound could not be played.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetSoundName()->sound_playevent()
< {only available when compiled with the |+sound| feature}
*sound_playfile()*
sound_playfile({path} [, {callback}])
Like `sound_playevent()` but play sound file {path}. {path}
must be a full path. On Ubuntu you may find files to play
with this command: >
:!find /usr/share/sounds -type f | grep -v index.theme
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetSoundPath()->sound_playfile()
< {only available when compiled with the |+sound| feature}
sound_stop({id}) *sound_stop()*
Stop playing sound {id}. {id} must be previously returned by
`sound_playevent()` or `sound_playfile()`.
On some Linux systems you may need the libcanberra-pulse
package, otherwise sound may not stop.
On MS-Windows, this does not work for event sound started by
`sound_playevent()`. To stop event sounds, use `sound_clear()`.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
soundid->sound_stop()
< {only available when compiled with the |+sound| feature}
*soundfold()*
soundfold({word})
Return the sound-folded equivalent of {word}. Uses the first
language in 'spelllang' for the current window that supports
soundfolding. 'spell' must be set. When no sound folding is
possible the {word} is returned unmodified.
This can be used for making spelling suggestions. Note that
the method can be quite slow.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWord()->soundfold()
<
*spellbadword()*
spellbadword([{sentence}])
Without argument: The result is the badly spelled word under
or after the cursor. The cursor is moved to the start of the
bad word. When no bad word is found in the cursor line the
result is an empty string and the cursor doesn't move.
With argument: The result is the first word in {sentence} that
is badly spelled. If there are no spelling mistakes the
result is an empty string.
The return value is a list with two items:
- The badly spelled word or an empty string.
- The type of the spelling error:
"bad" spelling mistake
"rare" rare word
"local" word only valid in another region
"caps" word should start with Capital
Example: >
echo spellbadword("the quik brown fox")
< ['quik', 'bad'] ~
The spelling information for the current window and the value
of 'spelllang' are used.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetText()->spellbadword()
<
*spellsuggest()*
spellsuggest({word} [, {max} [, {capital}]])
Return a |List| with spelling suggestions to replace {word}.
When {max} is given up to this number of suggestions are
returned. Otherwise up to 25 suggestions are returned.
When the {capital} argument is given and it's non-zero only
suggestions with a leading capital will be given. Use this
after a match with 'spellcapcheck'.
{word} can be a badly spelled word followed by other text.
This allows for joining two words that were split. The
suggestions also include the following text, thus you can
replace a line.
{word} may also be a good word. Similar words will then be
returned. {word} itself is not included in the suggestions,
although it may appear capitalized.
The spelling information for the current window is used. The
values of 'spelllang' and 'spellsuggest' are used.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWord()->spellsuggest()
split({string} [, {pattern} [, {keepempty}]]) *split()*
Make a |List| out of {string}. When {pattern} is omitted or
empty each white-separated sequence of characters becomes an
item.
Otherwise the string is split where {pattern} matches,
removing the matched characters. 'ignorecase' is not used
here, add \c to ignore case. |/\c|
When the first or last item is empty it is omitted, unless the
{keepempty} argument is given and it's non-zero.
Other empty items are kept when {pattern} matches at least one
character or when {keepempty} is non-zero.
Example: >
:let words = split(getline('.'), '\W\+')
< To split a string in individual characters: >
:for c in split(mystring, '\zs')
< If you want to keep the separator you can also use '\zs' at
the end of the pattern: >
:echo split('abc:def:ghi', ':\zs')
< ['abc:', 'def:', 'ghi'] ~
Splitting a table where the first element can be empty: >
:let items = split(line, ':', 1)
< The opposite function is |join()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetString()->split()
sqrt({expr}) *sqrt()*
Return the non-negative square root of Float {expr} as a
|Float|.
{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. When {expr}
is negative the result is NaN (Not a Number). Returns 0.0 if
{expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|.
Examples: >
:echo sqrt(100)
< 10.0 >
:echo sqrt(-4.01)
< nan
"nan" may be different, it depends on system libraries.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Compute()->sqrt()
srand([{expr}]) *srand()*
Initialize seed used by |rand()|:
- If {expr} is not given, seed values are initialized by
reading from /dev/urandom, if possible, or using time(NULL)
a.k.a. epoch time otherwise; this only has second accuracy.
- If {expr} is given it must be a Number. It is used to
initialize the seed values. This is useful for testing or
when a predictable sequence is intended.
Examples: >
:let seed = srand()
:let seed = srand(userinput)
:echo rand(seed)
state([{what}]) *state()*
Return a string which contains characters indicating the
current state. Mostly useful in callbacks that want to do
work that may not always be safe. Roughly this works like:
- callback uses state() to check if work is safe to do.
Yes: then do it right away.
No: add to work queue and add a |SafeState| and/or
|SafeStateAgain| autocommand (|SafeState| triggers at
toplevel, |SafeStateAgain| triggers after handling
messages and callbacks).
- When SafeState or SafeStateAgain is triggered and executes
your autocommand, check with `state()` if the work can be
done now, and if yes remove it from the queue and execute.
Remove the autocommand if the queue is now empty.
Also see |mode()|.
When {what} is given only characters in this string will be
added. E.g, this checks if the screen has scrolled: >
if state('s') == ''
" screen has not scrolled
<
These characters indicate the state, generally indicating that
something is busy:
m halfway a mapping, :normal command, feedkeys() or
stuffed command
o operator pending, e.g. after |d|
a Insert mode autocomplete active
x executing an autocommand
w blocked on waiting, e.g. ch_evalexpr(), ch_read() and
ch_readraw() when reading json
S not triggering SafeState or SafeStateAgain, e.g. after
|f| or a count
c callback invoked, including timer (repeats for
recursiveness up to "ccc")
s screen has scrolled for messages
str2float({string} [, {quoted}]) *str2float()*
Convert String {string} to a Float. This mostly works the
same as when using a floating point number in an expression,
see |floating-point-format|. But it's a bit more permissive.
E.g., "1e40" is accepted, while in an expression you need to
write "1.0e40". The hexadecimal form "0x123" is also
accepted, but not others, like binary or octal.
When {quoted} is present and non-zero then embedded single
quotes before the dot are ignored, thus "1'000.0" is a
thousand.
Text after the number is silently ignored.
The decimal point is always '.', no matter what the locale is
set to. A comma ends the number: "12,345.67" is converted to
12.0. You can strip out thousands separators with
|substitute()|: >
let f = str2float(substitute(text, ',', '', 'g'))
<
Returns 0.0 if the conversion fails.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
let f = text->substitute(',', '', 'g')->str2float()
str2list({string} [, {utf8}]) *str2list()*
Return a list containing the number values which represent
each character in String {string}. Examples: >
str2list(" ") returns [32]
str2list("ABC") returns [65, 66, 67]
< |list2str()| does the opposite.
When {utf8} is omitted or zero, the current 'encoding' is used.
When {utf8} is TRUE, always treat the String as UTF-8
characters. With UTF-8 composing characters are handled
properly: >
str2list("á") returns [97, 769]
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetString()->str2list()
str2nr({string} [, {base} [, {quoted}]]) *str2nr()*
Convert string {string} to a number.
{base} is the conversion base, it can be 2, 8, 10 or 16.
When {quoted} is present and non-zero then embedded single
quotes are ignored, thus "1'000'000" is a million.
When {base} is omitted base 10 is used. This also means that
a leading zero doesn't cause octal conversion to be used, as
with the default String to Number conversion. Example: >
let nr = str2nr('0123')
<
When {base} is 16 a leading "0x" or "0X" is ignored. With a
different base the result will be zero. Similarly, when
{base} is 8 a leading "0", "0o" or "0O" is ignored, and when
{base} is 2 a leading "0b" or "0B" is ignored.
Text after the number is silently ignored.
Returns 0 if {string} is empty or on error.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetText()->str2nr()
strcharlen({string}) *strcharlen()*
The result is a Number, which is the number of characters
in String {string}. Composing characters are ignored.
|strchars()| can count the number of characters, counting
composing characters separately.
Returns 0 if {string} is empty or on error.
Also see |strlen()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strwidth()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetText()->strcharlen()
strcharpart({src}, {start} [, {len} [, {skipcc}]]) *strcharpart()*
Like |strpart()| but using character index and length instead
of byte index and length.
When {skipcc} is omitted or zero, composing characters are
counted separately.
When {skipcc} set to 1, Composing characters are ignored,
similar to |slice()|.
When a character index is used where a character does not
exist it is omitted and counted as one character. For
example: >
strcharpart('abc', -1, 2)
< results in 'a'.
Returns an empty string on error.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetText()->strcharpart(5)
strchars({string} [, {skipcc}]) *strchars()*
The result is a Number, which is the number of characters
in String {string}.
When {skipcc} is omitted or zero, composing characters are
counted separately.
When {skipcc} set to 1, Composing characters are ignored.
|strcharlen()| always does this.
Returns zero on error.
Also see |strlen()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strwidth()|.
{skipcc} is only available after 7.4.755. For backward
compatibility, you can define a wrapper function: >
if has("patch-7.4.755")
function s:strchars(str, skipcc)
return strchars(a:str, a:skipcc)
endfunction
else
function s:strchars(str, skipcc)
if a:skipcc
return strlen(substitute(a:str, ".", "x", "g"))
else
return strchars(a:str)
endif
endfunction
endif
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetText()->strchars()
strdisplaywidth({string} [, {col}]) *strdisplaywidth()*
The result is a Number, which is the number of display cells
String {string} occupies on the screen when it starts at {col}
(first column is zero). When {col} is omitted zero is used.
Otherwise it is the screen column where to start. This
matters for Tab characters.
The option settings of the current window are used. This
matters for anything that's displayed differently, such as
'tabstop' and 'display'.
When {string} contains characters with East Asian Width Class
Ambiguous, this function's return value depends on 'ambiwidth'.
Returns zero on error.
Also see |strlen()|, |strwidth()| and |strchars()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetText()->strdisplaywidth()
strftime({format} [, {time}]) *strftime()*
The result is a String, which is a formatted date and time, as
specified by the {format} string. The given {time} is used,
or the current time if no time is given. The accepted
{format} depends on your system, thus this is not portable!
See the manual page of the C function strftime() for the
format. The maximum length of the result is 80 characters.
See also |localtime()|, |getftime()| and |strptime()|.
The language can be changed with the |:language| command.
Examples: >
:echo strftime("%c") Sun Apr 27 11:49:23 1997
:echo strftime("%Y %b %d %X") 1997 Apr 27 11:53:25
:echo strftime("%y%m%d %T") 970427 11:53:55
:echo strftime("%H:%M") 11:55
:echo strftime("%c", getftime("file.c"))
Show mod time of file.c.
< Not available on all systems. To check use: >
:if exists("*strftime")
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetFormat()->strftime()
strgetchar({str}, {index}) *strgetchar()*
Get a Number corresponding to the character at {index} in
{str}. This uses a zero-based character index, not a byte
index. Composing characters are considered separate
characters here. Use |nr2char()| to convert the Number to a
String.
Returns -1 if {index} is invalid.
Also see |strcharpart()| and |strchars()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetText()->strgetchar(5)
stridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}]) *stridx()*
The result is a Number, which gives the byte index in
{haystack} of the first occurrence of the String {needle}.
If {start} is specified, the search starts at index {start}.
This can be used to find a second match: >
:let colon1 = stridx(line, ":")
:let colon2 = stridx(line, ":", colon1 + 1)
< The search is done case-sensitive.
For pattern searches use |match()|.
-1 is returned if the {needle} does not occur in {haystack}.
See also |strridx()|.
Examples: >
:echo stridx("An Example", "Example") 3
:echo stridx("Starting point", "Start") 0
:echo stridx("Starting point", "start") -1
< *strstr()* *strchr()*
stridx() works similar to the C function strstr(). When used
with a single character it works similar to strchr().
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetHaystack()->stridx(needle)
<
*string()*
string({expr}) Return {expr} converted to a String. If {expr} is a Number,
Float, String, Blob or a composition of them, then the result
can be parsed back with |eval()|.
{expr} type result ~
String 'string' (single quotes are doubled)
Number 123
Float 123.123456 or 1.123456e8
Funcref function('name')
Blob 0z00112233.44556677.8899
List [item, item]
Dictionary {key: value, key: value}
Class class SomeName
Object object of SomeName {lnum: 1, col: 3}
When a |List| or |Dictionary| has a recursive reference it is
replaced by "[...]" or "{...}". Using eval() on the result
will then fail.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
mylist->string()
< Also see |strtrans()|.
strlen({string}) *strlen()*
The result is a Number, which is the length of the String
{string} in bytes.
If the argument is a Number it is first converted to a String.
For other types an error is given and zero is returned.
If you want to count the number of multibyte characters use
|strchars()|.
Also see |len()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strwidth()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetString()->strlen()
strpart({src}, {start} [, {len} [, {chars}]]) *strpart()*
The result is a String, which is part of {src}, starting from
byte {start}, with the byte length {len}.
When {chars} is present and TRUE then {len} is the number of
characters positions (composing characters are not counted
separately, thus "1" means one base character and any
following composing characters).
To count {start} as characters instead of bytes use
|strcharpart()|.
When bytes are selected which do not exist, this doesn't
result in an error, the bytes are simply omitted.
If {len} is missing, the copy continues from {start} till the
end of the {src}. >
strpart("abcdefg", 3, 2) == "de"
strpart("abcdefg", -2, 4) == "ab"
strpart("abcdefg", 5, 4) == "fg"
strpart("abcdefg", 3) == "defg"
< Note: To get the first character, {start} must be 0. For
example, to get the character under the cursor: >
strpart(getline("."), col(".") - 1, 1, v:true)
<
Returns an empty string on error.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetText()->strpart(5)
strptime({format}, {timestring}) *strptime()*
The result is a Number, which is a unix timestamp representing
the date and time in {timestring}, which is expected to match
the format specified in {format}.
The accepted {format} depends on your system, thus this is not
portable! See the manual page of the C function strptime()
for the format. Especially avoid "%c". The value of $TZ also
matters.
If the {timestring} cannot be parsed with {format} zero is
returned. If you do not know the format of {timestring} you
can try different {format} values until you get a non-zero
result.
See also |strftime()|.
Examples: >
:echo strptime("%Y %b %d %X", "1997 Apr 27 11:49:23")
< 862156163 >
:echo strftime("%c", strptime("%y%m%d %T", "970427 11:53:55"))
< Sun Apr 27 11:53:55 1997 >
:echo strftime("%c", strptime("%Y%m%d%H%M%S", "19970427115355") + 3600)
< Sun Apr 27 12:53:55 1997
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetFormat()->strptime(timestring)
<
Not available on all systems. To check use: >
:if exists("*strptime")
strridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}]) *strridx()*
The result is a Number, which gives the byte index in
{haystack} of the last occurrence of the String {needle}.
When {start} is specified, matches beyond this index are
ignored. This can be used to find a match before a previous
match: >
:let lastcomma = strridx(line, ",")
:let comma2 = strridx(line, ",", lastcomma - 1)
< The search is done case-sensitive.
For pattern searches use |match()|.
-1 is returned if the {needle} does not occur in {haystack}.
If the {needle} is empty the length of {haystack} is returned.
See also |stridx()|. Examples: >
:echo strridx("an angry armadillo", "an") 3
< *strrchr()*
When used with a single character it works similar to the C
function strrchr().
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetHaystack()->strridx(needle)
strtrans({string}) *strtrans()*
The result is a String, which is {string} with all unprintable
characters translated into printable characters |'isprint'|.
Like they are shown in a window. Example: >
echo strtrans(@a)
< This displays a newline in register a as "^@" instead of
starting a new line.
Returns an empty string on error.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetString()->strtrans()
strwidth({string}) *strwidth()*
The result is a Number, which is the number of display cells
String {string} occupies. A Tab character is counted as one
cell, alternatively use |strdisplaywidth()|.
When {string} contains characters with East Asian Width Class
Ambiguous, this function's return value depends on 'ambiwidth'.
Returns zero on error.
Also see |strlen()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strchars()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetString()->strwidth()
submatch({nr} [, {list}]) *submatch()* *E935*
Only for an expression in a |:substitute| command or
substitute() function.
Returns the {nr}'th submatch of the matched text. When {nr}
is 0 the whole matched text is returned.
Note that a NL in the string can stand for a line break of a
multi-line match or a NUL character in the text.
Also see |sub-replace-expression|.
If {list} is present and non-zero then submatch() returns
a list of strings, similar to |getline()| with two arguments.
NL characters in the text represent NUL characters in the
text.
Only returns more than one item for |:substitute|, inside
|substitute()| this list will always contain one or zero
items, since there are no real line breaks.
When substitute() is used recursively only the submatches in
the current (deepest) call can be obtained.
Returns an empty string or list on error.
Examples: >
:s/\d\+/\=submatch(0) + 1/
:echo substitute(text, '\d\+', '\=submatch(0) + 1', '')
< This finds the first number in the line and adds one to it.
A line break is included as a newline character.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetNr()->submatch()
substitute({string}, {pat}, {sub}, {flags}) *substitute()*
The result is a String, which is a copy of {string}, in which
the first match of {pat} is replaced with {sub}.
When {flags} is "g", all matches of {pat} in {string} are
replaced. Otherwise {flags} should be "".
This works like the ":substitute" command (without any flags).
But the matching with {pat} is always done like the 'magic'
option is set and 'cpoptions' is empty (to make scripts
portable). 'ignorecase' is still relevant, use |/\c| or |/\C|
if you want to ignore or match case and ignore 'ignorecase'.
'smartcase' is not used. See |string-match| for how {pat} is
used.
A "~" in {sub} is not replaced with the previous {sub}.
Note that some codes in {sub} have a special meaning
|sub-replace-special|. For example, to replace something with
"\n" (two characters), use "\\\\n" or '\\n'.
When {pat} does not match in {string}, {string} is returned
unmodified.
Example: >
:let &path = substitute(&path, ",\\=[^,]*$", "", "")
< This removes the last component of the 'path' option. >
:echo substitute("testing", ".*", "\\U\\0", "")
< results in "TESTING".
When {sub} starts with "\=", the remainder is interpreted as
an expression. See |sub-replace-expression|. Example: >
:echo substitute(s, '%\(\x\x\)',
\ '\=nr2char("0x" .. submatch(1))', 'g')
< When {sub} is a Funcref that function is called, with one
optional argument. Example: >
:echo substitute(s, '%\(\x\x\)', SubNr, 'g')
< The optional argument is a list which contains the whole
matched string and up to nine submatches, like what
|submatch()| returns. Example: >
:echo substitute(s, '%\(\x\x\)', {m -> '0x' .. m[1]}, 'g')
< Returns an empty string on error.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetString()->substitute(pat, sub, flags)
swapfilelist() *swapfilelist()*
Returns a list of swap file names, like what "vim -r" shows.
See the |-r| command argument. The 'directory' option is used
for the directories to inspect. If you only want to get a
list of swap files in the current directory then temporarily
set 'directory' to a dot: >
let save_dir = &directory
let &directory = '.'
let swapfiles = swapfilelist()
let &directory = save_dir
swapinfo({fname}) *swapinfo()*
The result is a dictionary, which holds information about the
swapfile {fname}. The available fields are:
version Vim version
user user name
host host name
fname original file name
pid PID of the Vim process that created the swap
file
mtime last modification time in seconds
inode Optional: INODE number of the file
dirty 1 if file was modified, 0 if not
Note that "user" and "host" are truncated to at most 39 bytes.
In case of failure an "error" item is added with the reason:
Cannot open file: file not found or in accessible
Cannot read file: cannot read first block
Not a swap file: does not contain correct block ID
Magic number mismatch: Info in first block is invalid
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetFilename()->swapinfo()
swapname({buf}) *swapname()*
The result is the swap file path of the buffer {expr}.
For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above.
If buffer {buf} is the current buffer, the result is equal to
|:swapname| (unless there is no swap file).
If buffer {buf} has no swap file, returns an empty string.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetBufname()->swapname()
synID({lnum}, {col}, {trans}) *synID()*
The result is a Number, which is the syntax ID at the position
{lnum} and {col} in the current window.
The syntax ID can be used with |synIDattr()| and
|synIDtrans()| to obtain syntax information about text.
{col} is 1 for the leftmost column, {lnum} is 1 for the first
line. 'synmaxcol' applies, in a longer line zero is returned.
Note that when the position is after the last character,
that's where the cursor can be in Insert mode, synID() returns
zero. {lnum} is used like with |getline()|.
When {trans} is |TRUE|, transparent items are reduced to the
item that they reveal. This is useful when wanting to know
the effective color. When {trans} is |FALSE|, the transparent
item is returned. This is useful when wanting to know which
syntax item is effective (e.g. inside parens).
Warning: This function can be very slow. Best speed is
obtained by going through the file in forward direction.
Returns zero on error.
Example (echoes the name of the syntax item under the cursor): >
:echo synIDattr(synID(line("."), col("."), 1), "name")
<
synIDattr({synID}, {what} [, {mode}]) *synIDattr()*
The result is a String, which is the {what} attribute of
syntax ID {synID}. This can be used to obtain information
about a syntax item.
{mode} can be "gui", "cterm" or "term", to get the attributes
for that mode. When {mode} is omitted, or an invalid value is
used, the attributes for the currently active highlighting are
used (GUI, cterm or term).
Use synIDtrans() to follow linked highlight groups.
{what} result
"name" the name of the syntax item
"fg" foreground color (GUI: color name used to set
the color, cterm: color number as a string,
term: empty string)
"bg" background color (as with "fg")
"font" font name (only available in the GUI)
|highlight-font|
"sp" special color for the GUI (as with "fg")
|highlight-guisp|
"ul" underline color for cterm: number as a string
"fg#" like "fg", but for the GUI and the GUI is
running the name in "#RRGGBB" form
"bg#" like "fg#" for "bg"
"sp#" like "fg#" for "sp"
"bold" "1" if bold
"italic" "1" if italic
"reverse" "1" if reverse
"inverse" "1" if inverse (= reverse)
"standout" "1" if standout
"underline" "1" if underlined
"undercurl" "1" if undercurled
"strike" "1" if strikethrough
"nocombine" "1" if nocombine
Returns an empty string on error.
Example (echoes the color of the syntax item under the
cursor): >
:echo synIDattr(synIDtrans(synID(line("."), col("."), 1)), "fg")
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
:echo synID(line("."), col("."), 1)->synIDtrans()->synIDattr("fg")
synIDtrans({synID}) *synIDtrans()*
The result is a Number, which is the translated syntax ID of
{synID}. This is the syntax group ID of what is being used to
highlight the character. Highlight links given with
":highlight link" are followed.
Returns zero on error.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
:echo synID(line("."), col("."), 1)->synIDtrans()->synIDattr("fg")
synconcealed({lnum}, {col}) *synconcealed()*
The result is a |List| with currently three items:
1. The first item in the list is 0 if the character at the
position {lnum} and {col} is not part of a concealable
region, 1 if it is. {lnum} is used like with |getline()|.
2. The second item in the list is a string. If the first item
is 1, the second item contains the text which will be
displayed in place of the concealed text, depending on the
current setting of 'conceallevel' and 'listchars'.
3. The third and final item in the list is a number
representing the specific syntax region matched in the
line. When the character is not concealed the value is
zero. This allows detection of the beginning of a new
concealable region if there are two consecutive regions
with the same replacement character. For an example, if
the text is "123456" and both "23" and "45" are concealed
and replaced by the character "X", then:
call returns ~
synconcealed(lnum, 1) [0, '', 0]
synconcealed(lnum, 2) [1, 'X', 1]
synconcealed(lnum, 3) [1, 'X', 1]
synconcealed(lnum, 4) [1, 'X', 2]
synconcealed(lnum, 5) [1, 'X', 2]
synconcealed(lnum, 6) [0, '', 0]
synstack({lnum}, {col}) *synstack()*
Return a |List|, which is the stack of syntax items at the
position {lnum} and {col} in the current window. {lnum} is
used like with |getline()|. Each item in the List is an ID
like what |synID()| returns.
The first item in the List is the outer region, following are
items contained in that one. The last one is what |synID()|
returns, unless not the whole item is highlighted or it is a
transparent item.
This function is useful for debugging a syntax file.
Example that shows the syntax stack under the cursor: >
for id in synstack(line("."), col("."))
echo synIDattr(id, "name")
endfor
< When the position specified with {lnum} and {col} is invalid
an empty List is returned. The position just after the last
character in a line and the first column in an empty line are
valid positions.
system({expr} [, {input}]) *system()* *E677*
Get the output of the shell command {expr} as a |String|. See
|systemlist()| to get the output as a |List|.
When {input} is given and is a |String| this string is written
to a file and passed as stdin to the command. The string is
written as-is, you need to take care of using the correct line
separators yourself.
If {input} is given and is a |List| it is written to the file
in a way |writefile()| does with {binary} set to "b" (i.e.
with a newline between each list item with newlines inside
list items converted to NULs).
When {input} is given and is a number that is a valid id for
an existing buffer then the content of the buffer is written
to the file line by line, each line terminated by a NL and
NULs characters where the text has a NL.
Pipes are not used, the 'shelltemp' option is not used.
When prepended by |:silent| the terminal will not be set to
cooked mode. This is meant to be used for commands that do
not need the user to type. It avoids stray characters showing
up on the screen which require |CTRL-L| to remove. >
:silent let f = system('ls *.vim')
<
Note: Use |shellescape()| or |::S| with |expand()| or
|fnamemodify()| to escape special characters in a command
argument. Newlines in {expr} may cause the command to fail.
The characters in 'shellquote' and 'shellxquote' may also
cause trouble.
This is not to be used for interactive commands.
The result is a String. Example: >
:let files = system('ls ' .. shellescape(expand('%:h')))
:let files = system('ls ' .. expand('%:h:S'))
< To make the result more system-independent, the shell output
is filtered to replace <CR> with <NL> for Macintosh, and
<CR><NL> with <NL> for DOS-like systems.
To avoid the string being truncated at a NUL, all NUL
characters are replaced with SOH (0x01).
The command executed is constructed using several options:
'shell' 'shellcmdflag' 'shellxquote' {expr} 'shellredir' {tmp} 'shellxquote'
({tmp} is an automatically generated file name).
For Unix, braces are put around {expr} to allow for
concatenated commands.
The command will be executed in "cooked" mode, so that a
CTRL-C will interrupt the command (on Unix at least).
The resulting error code can be found in |v:shell_error|.
This function will fail in |restricted-mode|.
Note that any wrong value in the options mentioned above may
make the function fail. It has also been reported to fail
when using a security agent application.
Unlike ":!cmd" there is no automatic check for changed files.
Use |:checktime| to force a check.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
:echo GetCmd()->system()
systemlist({expr} [, {input}]) *systemlist()*
Same as |system()|, but returns a |List| with lines (parts of
output separated by NL) with NULs transformed into NLs. Output
is the same as |readfile()| will output with {binary} argument
set to "b", except that there is no extra empty item when the
result ends in a NL.
Note that on MS-Windows you may get trailing CR characters.
To see the difference between "echo hello" and "echo -n hello"
use |system()| and |split()|: >
echo system('echo hello')->split('\n', 1)
<
Returns an empty string on error.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
:echo GetCmd()->systemlist()
tabpagebuflist([{arg}]) *tabpagebuflist()*
The result is a |List|, where each item is the number of the
buffer associated with each window in the current tab page.
{arg} specifies the number of the tab page to be used. When
omitted the current tab page is used.
When {arg} is invalid the number zero is returned.
To get a list of all buffers in all tabs use this: >
let buflist = []
for i in range(tabpagenr('$'))
call extend(buflist, tabpagebuflist(i + 1))
endfor
< Note that a buffer may appear in more than one window.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetTabpage()->tabpagebuflist()
tabpagenr([{arg}]) *tabpagenr()*
The result is a Number, which is the number of the current
tab page. The first tab page has number 1.
The optional argument {arg} supports the following values:
$ the number of the last tab page (the tab page
count).
# the number of the last accessed tab page
(where |g<Tab>| goes to). if there is no
previous tab page 0 is returned.
The number can be used with the |:tab| command.
Returns zero on error.
tabpagewinnr({tabarg} [, {arg}]) *tabpagewinnr()*
Like |winnr()| but for tab page {tabarg}.
{tabarg} specifies the number of tab page to be used.
{arg} is used like with |winnr()|:
- When omitted the current window number is returned. This is
the window which will be used when going to this tab page.
- When "$" the number of windows is returned.
- When "#" the previous window nr is returned.
Useful examples: >
tabpagewinnr(1) " current window of tab page 1
tabpagewinnr(4, '$') " number of windows in tab page 4
< When {tabarg} is invalid zero is returned.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetTabpage()->tabpagewinnr()
<
*tagfiles()*
tagfiles() Returns a |List| with the file names used to search for tags
for the current buffer. This is the 'tags' option expanded.
taglist({expr} [, {filename}]) *taglist()*
Returns a |List| of tags matching the regular expression {expr}.
If {filename} is passed it is used to prioritize the results
in the same way that |:tselect| does. See |tag-priority|.
{filename} should be the full path of the file.
Each list item is a dictionary with at least the following
entries:
name Name of the tag.
filename Name of the file where the tag is
defined. It is either relative to the
current directory or a full path.
cmd Ex command used to locate the tag in
the file.
kind Type of the tag. The value for this
entry depends on the language specific
kind values. Only available when
using a tags file generated by
Universal/Exuberant ctags or hdrtag.
static A file specific tag. Refer to
|static-tag| for more information.
More entries may be present, depending on the content of the
tags file: access, implementation, inherits and signature.
Refer to the ctags documentation for information about these
fields. For C code the fields "struct", "class" and "enum"
may appear, they give the name of the entity the tag is
contained in.
The ex-command "cmd" can be either an ex search pattern, a
line number or a line number followed by a byte number.
If there are no matching tags, then an empty list is returned.
To get an exact tag match, the anchors '^' and '$' should be
used in {expr}. This also make the function work faster.
Refer to |tag-regexp| for more information about the tag
search regular expression pattern.
Refer to |'tags'| for information about how the tags file is
located by Vim. Refer to |tags-file-format| for the format of
the tags file generated by the different ctags tools.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetTagpattern()->taglist()
tan({expr}) *tan()*
Return the tangent of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float|
in the range [-inf, inf].
{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|.
Examples: >
:echo tan(10)
< 0.648361 >
:echo tan(-4.01)
< -1.181502
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Compute()->tan()
tanh({expr}) *tanh()*
Return the hyperbolic tangent of {expr} as a |Float| in the
range [-1, 1].
{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|.
Examples: >
:echo tanh(0.5)
< 0.462117 >
:echo tanh(-1)
< -0.761594
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Compute()->tanh()
tempname() *tempname()* *temp-file-name*
The result is a String, which is the name of a file that
doesn't exist. It can be used for a temporary file. The name
is different for at least 26 consecutive calls. Example: >
:let tmpfile = tempname()
:exe "redir > " .. tmpfile
< For Unix, the file will be in a private directory |tempfile|.
For MS-Windows forward slashes are used when the 'shellslash'
option is set, or when 'shellcmdflag' starts with '-' and
'shell' does not contain powershell or pwsh.
term_ functions are documented here: |terminal-function-details|
terminalprops() *terminalprops()*
Returns a |Dictionary| with properties of the terminal that Vim
detected from the response to |t_RV| request. See
|v:termresponse| for the response itself. If |v:termresponse|
is empty most values here will be 'u' for unknown.
cursor_style whether sending |t_RS| works **
cursor_blink_mode whether sending |t_RC| works **
underline_rgb whether |t_8u| works **
mouse mouse type supported
kitty whether Kitty terminal was detected
** value 'u' for unknown, 'y' for yes, 'n' for no
If the |+termresponse| feature is missing then the result is
an empty dictionary.
If "cursor_style" is 'y' then |t_RS| will be sent to request the
current cursor style.
If "cursor_blink_mode" is 'y' then |t_RC| will be sent to
request the cursor blink status.
"cursor_style" and "cursor_blink_mode" are also set if |t_u7|
is not empty, Vim will detect the working of sending |t_RS|
and |t_RC| on startup.
When "underline_rgb" is not 'y', then |t_8u| will be made empty.
This avoids sending it to xterm, which would clear the colors.
For "mouse" the value 'u' is unknown
Also see:
- 'ambiwidth' - detected by using |t_u7|.
- |v:termstyleresp| and |v:termblinkresp| for the response to
|t_RS| and |t_RC|.
test_ functions are documented here: |test-functions-details|
*timer_info()*
timer_info([{id}])
Return a list with information about timers.
When {id} is given only information about this timer is
returned. When timer {id} does not exist an empty list is
returned.
When {id} is omitted information about all timers is returned.
For each timer the information is stored in a |Dictionary| with
these items:
"id" the timer ID
"time" time the timer was started with
"remaining" time until the timer fires
"repeat" number of times the timer will still fire;
-1 means forever
"callback" the callback
"paused" 1 if the timer is paused, 0 otherwise
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetTimer()->timer_info()
< {only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature}
timer_pause({timer}, {paused}) *timer_pause()*
Pause or unpause a timer. A paused timer does not invoke its
callback when its time expires. Unpausing a timer may cause
the callback to be invoked almost immediately if enough time
has passed.
Pausing a timer is useful to avoid the callback to be called
for a short time.
If {paused} evaluates to a non-zero Number or a non-empty
String, then the timer is paused, otherwise it is unpaused.
See |non-zero-arg|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetTimer()->timer_pause(1)
< {only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature}
*timer_start()* *timer* *timers*
timer_start({time}, {callback} [, {options}])
Create a timer and return the timer ID.
{time} is the waiting time in milliseconds. This is the
minimum time before invoking the callback. When the system is
busy or Vim is not waiting for input the time will be longer.
Zero can be used to execute the callback when Vim is back in
the main loop.
{callback} is the function to call. It can be the name of a
function or a |Funcref|. It is called with one argument, which
is the timer ID. The callback is only invoked when Vim is
waiting for input.
If you want to show a message look at |popup_notification()|
to avoid interfering with what the user is doing.
{options} is a dictionary. Supported entries:
"repeat" Number of times to repeat calling the
callback. -1 means forever. When not present
the callback will be called once.
If the timer causes an error three times in a
row the repeat is cancelled. This avoids that
Vim becomes unusable because of all the error
messages.
Returns -1 on error.
Example: >
func MyHandler(timer)
echo 'Handler called'
endfunc
let timer = timer_start(500, 'MyHandler',
\ {'repeat': 3})
< This will invoke MyHandler() three times at 500 msec
intervals.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetMsec()->timer_start(callback)
< Not available in the |sandbox|.
{only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature}
timer_stop({timer}) *timer_stop()*
Stop a timer. The timer callback will no longer be invoked.
{timer} is an ID returned by timer_start(), thus it must be a
Number. If {timer} does not exist there is no error.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetTimer()->timer_stop()
< {only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature}
timer_stopall() *timer_stopall()*
Stop all timers. The timer callbacks will no longer be
invoked. Useful if a timer is misbehaving. If there are no
timers there is no error.
{only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature}
tolower({expr}) *tolower()*
The result is a copy of the String given, with all uppercase
characters turned into lowercase (just like applying |gu| to
the string). Returns an empty string on error.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetText()->tolower()
toupper({expr}) *toupper()*
The result is a copy of the String given, with all lowercase
characters turned into uppercase (just like applying |gU| to
the string). Returns an empty string on error.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetText()->toupper()
tr({src}, {fromstr}, {tostr}) *tr()*
The result is a copy of the {src} string with all characters
which appear in {fromstr} replaced by the character in that
position in the {tostr} string. Thus the first character in
{fromstr} is translated into the first character in {tostr}
and so on. Exactly like the unix "tr" command.
This code also deals with multibyte characters properly.
Returns an empty string on error.
Examples: >
echo tr("hello there", "ht", "HT")
< returns "Hello THere" >
echo tr("<blob>", "<>", "{}")
< returns "{blob}"
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetText()->tr(from, to)
trim({text} [, {mask} [, {dir}]]) *trim()*
Return {text} as a String where any character in {mask} is
removed from the beginning and/or end of {text}.
If {mask} is not given, {mask} is all characters up to 0x20,
which includes Tab, space, NL and CR, plus the non-breaking
space character 0xa0.
The optional {dir} argument specifies where to remove the
characters:
0 remove from the beginning and end of {text}
1 remove only at the beginning of {text}
2 remove only at the end of {text}
When omitted both ends are trimmed.
This function deals with multibyte characters properly.
Returns an empty string on error.
Examples: >
echo trim(" some text ")
< returns "some text" >
echo trim(" \r\t\t\r RESERVE \t\n\x0B\xA0") .. "_TAIL"
< returns "RESERVE_TAIL" >
echo trim("rm<Xrm<>X>rrm", "rm<>")
< returns "Xrm<>X" (characters in the middle are not removed) >
echo trim(" vim ", " ", 2)
< returns " vim"
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetText()->trim()
trunc({expr}) *trunc()*
Return the largest integral value with magnitude less than or
equal to {expr} as a |Float| (truncate towards zero).
{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|.
Examples: >
echo trunc(1.456)
< 1.0 >
echo trunc(-5.456)
< -5.0 >
echo trunc(4.0)
< 4.0
Can also be used as a |method|: >
Compute()->trunc()
<
*type()*
type({expr}) The result is a Number representing the type of {expr}.
Instead of using the number directly, it is better to use the
v:t_ variable that has the value:
Number: 0 |v:t_number|
String: 1 |v:t_string|
Funcref: 2 |v:t_func|
List: 3 |v:t_list|
Dictionary: 4 |v:t_dict|
Float: 5 |v:t_float|
Boolean: 6 |v:t_bool| (v:false and v:true)
None: 7 |v:t_none| (v:null and v:none)
Job: 8 |v:t_job|
Channel: 9 |v:t_channel|
Blob: 10 |v:t_blob|
Class 12 |v:t_class|
Object 13 |v:t_object|
For backward compatibility, this method can be used: >
:if type(myvar) == type(0)
:if type(myvar) == type("")
:if type(myvar) == type(function("tr"))
:if type(myvar) == type([])
:if type(myvar) == type({})
:if type(myvar) == type(0.0)
:if type(myvar) == type(v:false)
:if type(myvar) == type(v:none)
< To check if the v:t_ variables exist use this: >
:if exists('v:t_number')
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
mylist->type()
typename({expr}) *typename()*
Return a string representation of the type of {expr}.
Example: >
echo typename([1, 2, 3])
< list<number> ~
undofile({name}) *undofile()*
Return the name of the undo file that would be used for a file
with name {name} when writing. This uses the 'undodir'
option, finding directories that exist. It does not check if
the undo file exists.
{name} is always expanded to the full path, since that is what
is used internally.
If {name} is empty undofile() returns an empty string, since a
buffer without a file name will not write an undo file.
Useful in combination with |:wundo| and |:rundo|.
When compiled without the |+persistent_undo| option this always
returns an empty string.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetFilename()->undofile()
undotree() *undotree()*
Return the current state of the undo tree in a dictionary with
the following items:
"seq_last" The highest undo sequence number used.
"seq_cur" The sequence number of the current position in
the undo tree. This differs from "seq_last"
when some changes were undone.
"time_cur" Time last used for |:earlier| and related
commands. Use |strftime()| to convert to
something readable.
"save_last" Number of the last file write. Zero when no
write yet.
"save_cur" Number of the current position in the undo
tree.
"synced" Non-zero when the last undo block was synced.
This happens when waiting from input from the
user. See |undo-blocks|.
"entries" A list of dictionaries with information about
undo blocks.
The first item in the "entries" list is the oldest undo item.
Each List item is a |Dictionary| with these items:
"seq" Undo sequence number. Same as what appears in
|:undolist|.
"time" Timestamp when the change happened. Use
|strftime()| to convert to something readable.
"newhead" Only appears in the item that is the last one
that was added. This marks the last change
and where further changes will be added.
"curhead" Only appears in the item that is the last one
that was undone. This marks the current
position in the undo tree, the block that will
be used by a redo command. When nothing was
undone after the last change this item will
not appear anywhere.
"save" Only appears on the last block before a file
write. The number is the write count. The
first write has number 1, the last one the
"save_last" mentioned above.
"alt" Alternate entry. This is again a List of undo
blocks. Each item may again have an "alt"
item.
uniq({list} [, {func} [, {dict}]]) *uniq()* *E882*
Remove second and succeeding copies of repeated adjacent
{list} items in-place. Returns {list}. If you want a list
to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
:let newlist = uniq(copy(mylist))
< The default compare function uses the string representation of
each item. For the use of {func} and {dict} see |sort()|.
Returns zero if {list} is not a |List|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
mylist->uniq()
values({dict}) *values()*
Return a |List| with all the values of {dict}. The |List| is
in arbitrary order. Also see |items()| and |keys()|.
Returns zero if {dict} is not a |Dict|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
mydict->values()
virtcol({expr} [, {list}]) *virtcol()*
The result is a Number, which is the screen column of the file
position given with {expr}. That is, the last screen position
occupied by the character at that position, when the screen
would be of unlimited width. When there is a <Tab> at the
position, the returned Number will be the column at the end of
the <Tab>. For example, for a <Tab> in column 1, with 'ts'
set to 8, it returns 8. |conceal| is ignored.
For the byte position use |col()|.
For the use of {expr} see |col()|.
When 'virtualedit' is used {expr} can be [lnum, col, off],
where "off" is the offset in screen columns from the start of
the character. E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the
last character. When "off" is omitted zero is used. When
Virtual editing is active in the current mode, a position
beyond the end of the line can be returned. Also see
|'virtualedit'|
The accepted positions are:
. the cursor position
$ the end of the cursor line (the result is the
number of displayed characters in the cursor line
plus one)
'x position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is
returned)
v In Visual mode: the start of the Visual area (the
cursor is the end). When not in Visual mode
returns the cursor position. Differs from |'<| in
that it's updated right away.
If {list} is present and non-zero then virtcol() returns a List
with the first and last screen position occupied by the
character.
Note that only marks in the current file can be used.
Examples: >
" With text "foo^Lbar" and cursor on the "^L":
virtcol(".") " returns 5
virtcol(".", 1) " returns [4, 5]
virtcol("$") " returns 9
" With text " there", with 't at 'h':
virtcol("'t") " returns 6
< The first column is 1. 0 is returned for an error.
A more advanced example that echoes the maximum length of
all lines: >
echo max(map(range(1, line('$')), "virtcol([v:val, '$'])"))
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetPos()->virtcol()
virtcol2col({winid}, {lnum}, {col}) *virtcol2col()*
The result is a Number, which is the byte index of the
character in window {winid} at buffer line {lnum} and virtual
column {col}.
If {col} is greater than the last virtual column in line
{lnum}, then the byte index of the character at the last
virtual column is returned.
The {winid} argument can be the window number or the
|window-ID|. If this is zero, then the current window is used.
Returns -1 if the window {winid} doesn't exist or the buffer
line {lnum} or virtual column {col} is invalid.
See also |screenpos()|, |virtcol()| and |col()|.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWinid()->virtcol2col(lnum, col)
visualmode([{expr}]) *visualmode()*
The result is a String, which describes the last Visual mode
used in the current buffer. Initially it returns an empty
string, but once Visual mode has been used, it returns "v",
"V", or "<CTRL-V>" (a single CTRL-V character) for
character-wise, line-wise, or block-wise Visual mode
respectively.
Example: >
:exe "normal " .. visualmode()
< This enters the same Visual mode as before. It is also useful
in scripts if you wish to act differently depending on the
Visual mode that was used.
If Visual mode is active, use |mode()| to get the Visual mode
(e.g., in a |:vmap|).
If {expr} is supplied and it evaluates to a non-zero Number or
a non-empty String, then the Visual mode will be cleared and
the old value is returned. See |non-zero-arg|.
wildmenumode() *wildmenumode()*
Returns |TRUE| when the wildmenu is active and |FALSE|
otherwise. See 'wildmenu' and 'wildmode'.
This can be used in mappings to handle the 'wildcharm' option
gracefully. (Makes only sense with |mapmode-c| mappings).
For example to make <c-j> work like <down> in wildmode, use: >
:cnoremap <expr> <C-j> wildmenumode() ? "\<Down>\<Tab>" : "\<c-j>"
<
(Note, this needs the 'wildcharm' option set appropriately).
win_execute({id}, {command} [, {silent}]) *win_execute()*
Like `execute()` but in the context of window {id}.
The window will temporarily be made the current window,
without triggering autocommands or changing directory. When
executing {command} autocommands will be triggered, this may
have unexpected side effects. Use |:noautocmd| if needed.
Example: >
call win_execute(winid, 'set syntax=python')
< Doing the same with `setwinvar()` would not trigger
autocommands and not actually show syntax highlighting.
*E994*
Not all commands are allowed in popup windows.
When window {id} does not exist then no error is given and
an empty string is returned.
Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
second argument: >
GetCommand()->win_execute(winid)
win_findbuf({bufnr}) *win_findbuf()*
Returns a |List| with |window-ID|s for windows that contain
buffer {bufnr}. When there is none the list is empty.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetBufnr()->win_findbuf()
win_getid([{win} [, {tab}]]) *win_getid()*
Get the |window-ID| for the specified window.
When {win} is missing use the current window.
With {win} this is the window number. The top window has
number 1.
Without {tab} use the current tab, otherwise the tab with
number {tab}. The first tab has number one.
Return zero if the window cannot be found.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWinnr()->win_getid()
win_gettype([{nr}]) *win_gettype()*
Return the type of the window:
"autocmd" autocommand window. Temporary window
used to execute autocommands.
"command" command-line window |cmdwin|
(empty) normal window
"loclist" |location-list-window|
"popup" popup window |popup|
"preview" preview window |preview-window|
"quickfix" |quickfix-window|
"unknown" window {nr} not found
When {nr} is omitted return the type of the current window.
When {nr} is given return the type of this window by number or
|window-ID|.
Also see the 'buftype' option. When running a terminal in a
popup window then 'buftype' is "terminal" and win_gettype()
returns "popup".
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWinid()->win_gettype()
<
win_gotoid({expr}) *win_gotoid()*
Go to window with ID {expr}. This may also change the current
tabpage.
Return TRUE if successful, FALSE if the window cannot be found.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWinid()->win_gotoid()
win_id2tabwin({expr}) *win_id2tabwin()*
Return a list with the tab number and window number of window
with ID {expr}: [tabnr, winnr].
Return [0, 0] if the window cannot be found.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWinid()->win_id2tabwin()
win_id2win({expr}) *win_id2win()*
Return the window number of window with ID {expr}.
Return 0 if the window cannot be found in the current tabpage.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWinid()->win_id2win()
win_move_separator({nr}, {offset}) *win_move_separator()*
Move window {nr}'s vertical separator (i.e., the right border)
by {offset} columns, as if being dragged by the mouse. {nr}
can be a window number or |window-ID|. A positive {offset}
moves right and a negative {offset} moves left. Moving a
window's vertical separator will change the width of the
window and the width of other windows adjacent to the vertical
separator. The magnitude of movement may be smaller than
specified (e.g., as a consequence of maintaining
'winminwidth'). Returns TRUE if the window can be found and
FALSE otherwise.
This will fail for the rightmost window and a full-width
window, since it has no separator on the right.
Only works for the current tab page. *E1308*
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWinnr()->win_move_separator(offset)
win_move_statusline({nr}, {offset}) *win_move_statusline()*
Move window {nr}'s status line (i.e., the bottom border) by
{offset} rows, as if being dragged by the mouse. {nr} can be a
window number or |window-ID|. A positive {offset} moves down
and a negative {offset} moves up. Moving a window's status
line will change the height of the window and the height of
other windows adjacent to the status line. The magnitude of
movement may be smaller than specified (e.g., as a consequence
of maintaining 'winminheight'). Returns TRUE if the window can
be found and FALSE otherwise.
Only works for the current tab page.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWinnr()->win_move_statusline(offset)
win_screenpos({nr}) *win_screenpos()*
Return the screen position of window {nr} as a list with two
numbers: [row, col]. The first window always has position
[1, 1], unless there is a tabline, then it is [2, 1].
{nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. Use zero
for the current window.
Returns [0, 0] if the window cannot be found in the current
tabpage.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWinid()->win_screenpos()
<
win_splitmove({nr}, {target} [, {options}]) *win_splitmove()*
Move the window {nr} to a new split of the window {target}.
This is similar to moving to {target}, creating a new window
using |:split| but having the same contents as window {nr}, and
then closing {nr}.
Both {nr} and {target} can be window numbers or |window-ID|s.
Both must be in the current tab page.
Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure.
{options} is a |Dictionary| with the following optional entries:
"vertical" When TRUE, the split is created vertically,
like with |:vsplit|.
"rightbelow" When TRUE, the split is made below or to the
right (if vertical). When FALSE, it is done
above or to the left (if vertical). When not
present, the values of 'splitbelow' and
'splitright' are used.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWinid()->win_splitmove(target)
<
*winbufnr()*
winbufnr({nr}) The result is a Number, which is the number of the buffer
associated with window {nr}. {nr} can be the window number or
the |window-ID|.
When {nr} is zero, the number of the buffer in the current
window is returned.
When window {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned.
Example: >
:echo "The file in the current window is " . bufname(winbufnr(0))
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
FindWindow()->winbufnr()->bufname()
<
*wincol()*
wincol() The result is a Number, which is the virtual column of the
cursor in the window. This is counting screen cells from the
left side of the window. The leftmost column is one.
*windowsversion()*
windowsversion()
The result is a String. For MS-Windows it indicates the OS
version. E.g, Windows 10 is "10.0", Windows 8 is "6.2",
Windows XP is "5.1". For non-MS-Windows systems the result is
an empty string.
winheight({nr}) *winheight()*
The result is a Number, which is the height of window {nr}.
{nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
When {nr} is zero, the height of the current window is
returned. When window {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned.
An existing window always has a height of zero or more.
This excludes any window toolbar line.
Examples: >
:echo "The current window has " .. winheight(0) .. " lines."
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWinid()->winheight()
<
winlayout([{tabnr}]) *winlayout()*
The result is a nested List containing the layout of windows
in a tabpage.
Without {tabnr} use the current tabpage, otherwise the tabpage
with number {tabnr}. If the tabpage {tabnr} is not found,
returns an empty list.
For a leaf window, it returns:
['leaf', {winid}]
For horizontally split windows, which form a column, it
returns:
['col', [{nested list of windows}]]
For vertically split windows, which form a row, it returns:
['row', [{nested list of windows}]]
Example: >
" Only one window in the tab page
:echo winlayout()
['leaf', 1000]
" Two horizontally split windows
:echo winlayout()
['col', [['leaf', 1000], ['leaf', 1001]]]
" The second tab page, with three horizontally split
" windows, with two vertically split windows in the
" middle window
:echo winlayout(2)
['col', [['leaf', 1002], ['row', [['leaf', 1003],
['leaf', 1001]]], ['leaf', 1000]]]
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetTabnr()->winlayout()
<
*winline()*
winline() The result is a Number, which is the screen line of the cursor
in the window. This is counting screen lines from the top of
the window. The first line is one.
If the cursor was moved the view on the file will be updated
first, this may cause a scroll.
*winnr()*
winnr([{arg}]) The result is a Number, which is the number of the current
window. The top window has number 1.
Returns zero for a popup window.
The optional argument {arg} supports the following values:
$ the number of the last window (the window
count).
# the number of the last accessed window (where
|CTRL-W_p| goes to). If there is no previous
window or it is in another tab page 0 is
returned.
{N}j the number of the Nth window below the
current window (where |CTRL-W_j| goes to).
{N}k the number of the Nth window above the current
window (where |CTRL-W_k| goes to).
{N}h the number of the Nth window left of the
current window (where |CTRL-W_h| goes to).
{N}l the number of the Nth window right of the
current window (where |CTRL-W_l| goes to).
The number can be used with |CTRL-W_w| and ":wincmd w"
|:wincmd|.
When {arg} is invalid an error is given and zero is returned.
Also see |tabpagewinnr()| and |win_getid()|.
Examples: >
let window_count = winnr('$')
let prev_window = winnr('#')
let wnum = winnr('3k')
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWinval()->winnr()
<
*winrestcmd()*
winrestcmd() Returns a sequence of |:resize| commands that should restore
the current window sizes. Only works properly when no windows
are opened or closed and the current window and tab page is
unchanged.
Example: >
:let cmd = winrestcmd()
:call MessWithWindowSizes()
:exe cmd
<
*winrestview()*
winrestview({dict})
Uses the |Dictionary| returned by |winsaveview()| to restore
the view of the current window.
Note: The {dict} does not have to contain all values, that are
returned by |winsaveview()|. If values are missing, those
settings won't be restored. So you can use: >
:call winrestview({'curswant': 4})
<
This will only set the curswant value (the column the cursor
wants to move on vertical movements) of the cursor to column 5
(yes, that is 5), while all other settings will remain the
same. This is useful, if you set the cursor position manually.
If you have changed the values the result is unpredictable.
If the window size changed the result won't be the same.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetView()->winrestview()
<
*winsaveview()*
winsaveview() Returns a |Dictionary| that contains information to restore
the view of the current window. Use |winrestview()| to
restore the view.
This is useful if you have a mapping that jumps around in the
buffer and you want to go back to the original view.
This does not save fold information. Use the 'foldenable'
option to temporarily switch off folding, so that folds are
not opened when moving around. This may have side effects.
The return value includes:
lnum cursor line number
col cursor column (Note: the first column
zero, as opposed to what |getcurpos()|
returns)
coladd cursor column offset for 'virtualedit'
curswant column for vertical movement (Note:
the first column is zero, as opposed
to what |getcurpos()| returns). After
|$| command it will be a very large
number equal to |v:maxcol|.
topline first line in the window
topfill filler lines, only in diff mode
leftcol first column displayed; only used when
'wrap' is off
skipcol columns skipped
Note that no option values are saved.
winwidth({nr}) *winwidth()*
The result is a Number, which is the width of window {nr}.
{nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
When {nr} is zero, the width of the current window is
returned. When window {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned.
An existing window always has a width of zero or more.
Examples: >
:echo "The current window has " .. winwidth(0) .. " columns."
:if winwidth(0) <= 50
: 50 wincmd |
:endif
< For getting the terminal or screen size, see the 'columns'
option.
Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetWinid()->winwidth()
wordcount() *wordcount()*
The result is a dictionary of byte/chars/word statistics for
the current buffer. This is the same info as provided by
|g_CTRL-G|
The return value includes:
bytes Number of bytes in the buffer
chars Number of chars in the buffer
words Number of words in the buffer
cursor_bytes Number of bytes before cursor position
(not in Visual mode)
cursor_chars Number of chars before cursor position
(not in Visual mode)
cursor_words Number of words before cursor position
(not in Visual mode)
visual_bytes Number of bytes visually selected
(only in Visual mode)
visual_chars Number of chars visually selected
(only in Visual mode)
visual_words Number of words visually selected
(only in Visual mode)
*writefile()*
writefile({object}, {fname} [, {flags}])
When {object} is a |List| write it to file {fname}. Each list
item is separated with a NL. Each list item must be a String
or Number.
All NL characters are replaced with a NUL character.
Inserting CR characters needs to be done before passing {list}
to writefile().
When {object} is a |Blob| write the bytes to file {fname}
unmodified, also when binary mode is not specified.
{flags} must be a String. These characters are recognized:
'b' Binary mode is used: There will not be a NL after the
last list item. An empty item at the end does cause the
last line in the file to end in a NL.
'a' Append mode is used, lines are appended to the file: >
:call writefile(["foo"], "event.log", "a")
:call writefile(["bar"], "event.log", "a")
<
'D' Delete the file when the current function ends. This
works like: >
:defer delete({fname})
< Fails when not in a function. Also see |:defer|.
's' fsync() is called after writing the file. This flushes
the file to disk, if possible. This takes more time but
avoids losing the file if the system crashes.
'S' fsync() is not called, even when 'fsync' is set.
When {flags} does not contain "S" or "s" then fsync() is
called if the 'fsync' option is set.
An existing file is overwritten, if possible.
When the write fails -1 is returned, otherwise 0. There is an
error message if the file can't be created or when writing
fails.
Also see |readfile()|.
To copy a file byte for byte: >
:let fl = readfile("foo", "b")
:call writefile(fl, "foocopy", "b")
< Can also be used as a |method|: >
GetText()->writefile("thefile")
xor({expr}, {expr}) *xor()*
Bitwise XOR on the two arguments. The arguments are converted
to a number. A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error.
Also see `and()` and `or()`.
Example: >
:let bits = xor(bits, 0x80)
<
Can also be used as a |method|: >
:let bits = bits->xor(0x80)
<
==============================================================================
3. Feature list *feature-list*
There are three types of features:
1. Features that are only supported when they have been enabled when Vim
was compiled |+feature-list|. Example: >
:if has("cindent")
< *gui_running*
2. Features that are only supported when certain conditions have been met.
Example: >
:if has("gui_running")
< *has-patch*
3. Beyond a certain version or at a certain version and including a specific
patch. The "patch-7.4.248" feature means that the Vim version is 7.5 or
later, or it is version 7.4 and patch 248 was included. Example: >
:if has("patch-7.4.248")
< Note that it's possible for patch 248 to be omitted even though 249 is
included. Only happens when cherry-picking patches.
Note that this form only works for patch 7.4.237 and later, before that
you need to check for the patch and the v:version. Example (checking
version 6.2.148 or later): >
:if v:version > 602 || (v:version == 602 && has("patch148"))
Hint: To find out if Vim supports backslashes in a file name (MS-Windows),
use: `if exists('+shellslash')`
acl Compiled with |ACL| support.
all_builtin_terms Compiled with all builtin terminals enabled. (always
true)
amiga Amiga version of Vim.
arabic Compiled with Arabic support |Arabic|.
arp Compiled with ARP support (Amiga).
autocmd Compiled with autocommand support. (always true)
autochdir Compiled with support for 'autochdir'
autoservername Automatically enable |clientserver|
balloon_eval Compiled with |balloon-eval| support.
balloon_multiline GUI supports multiline balloons.
beos BeOS version of Vim.
browse Compiled with |:browse| support, and browse() will
work.
browsefilter Compiled with support for |browsefilter|.
bsd Compiled on an OS in the BSD family (excluding macOS).
builtin_terms Compiled with some builtin terminals. (always true)
byte_offset Compiled with support for 'o' in 'statusline'
channel Compiled with support for |channel| and |job|
cindent Compiled with 'cindent' support. (always true)
clientserver Compiled with remote invocation support |clientserver|.
clipboard Compiled with 'clipboard' support.
clipboard_working Compiled with 'clipboard' support and it can be used.
cmdline_compl Compiled with |cmdline-completion| support.
cmdline_hist Compiled with |cmdline-history| support.
cmdline_info Compiled with 'showcmd' and 'ruler' support.
comments Compiled with |'comments'| support.
compatible Compiled to be very Vi compatible.
conpty Platform where |ConPTY| can be used.
cryptv Compiled with encryption support |encryption|.
cscope Compiled with |cscope| support.
cursorbind Compiled with |'cursorbind'| (always true)
debug Compiled with "DEBUG" defined.
dialog_con Compiled with console dialog support.
dialog_gui Compiled with GUI dialog support.
diff Compiled with |vimdiff| and 'diff' support.
digraphs Compiled with support for digraphs.
directx Compiled with support for DirectX and 'renderoptions'.
dnd Compiled with support for the "~ register |quote_~|.
drop_file Compiled with |drop_file| support.
ebcdic Compiled on a machine with ebcdic character set.
emacs_tags Compiled with support for Emacs tags.
eval Compiled with expression evaluation support. Always
true, of course!
ex_extra |+ex_extra| (always true)
extra_search Compiled with support for |'incsearch'| and
|'hlsearch'|
farsi Support for Farsi was removed |farsi|.
file_in_path Compiled with support for |gf| and |<cfile>| (always
true)
filterpipe When 'shelltemp' is off pipes are used for shell
read/write/filter commands
find_in_path Compiled with support for include file searches
|+find_in_path|.
float Compiled with support for |Float|.
fname_case Case in file names matters (for Amiga and MS-Windows
this is not present).
folding Compiled with |folding| support.
footer Compiled with GUI footer support. |gui-footer|
fork Compiled to use fork()/exec() instead of system().
gettext Compiled with message translation |multi-lang|
gui Compiled with GUI enabled.
gui_athena Compiled with Athena GUI (always false).
gui_gnome Compiled with Gnome support (gui_gtk is also defined).
gui_gtk Compiled with GTK+ GUI (any version).
gui_gtk2 Compiled with GTK+ 2 GUI (gui_gtk is also defined).
gui_gtk3 Compiled with GTK+ 3 GUI (gui_gtk is also defined).
gui_haiku Compiled with Haiku GUI.
gui_mac Compiled with Macintosh GUI.
gui_motif Compiled with Motif GUI.
gui_photon Compiled with Photon GUI.
gui_running Vim is running in the GUI, or it will start soon.
gui_win32 Compiled with MS-Windows Win32 GUI.
gui_win32s idem, and Win32s system being used (Windows 3.1)
haiku Haiku version of Vim.
hangul_input Compiled with Hangul input support. |hangul|
hpux HP-UX version of Vim.
iconv Can use iconv() for conversion.
insert_expand Compiled with support for CTRL-X expansion commands in
Insert mode. (always true)
job Compiled with support for |channel| and |job|
ipv6 Compiled with support for IPv6 networking in |channel|.
jumplist Compiled with |jumplist| support. (always true)
keymap Compiled with 'keymap' support.
lambda Compiled with |lambda| support.
langmap Compiled with 'langmap' support.
libcall Compiled with |libcall()| support.
linebreak Compiled with 'linebreak', 'breakat', 'showbreak' and
'breakindent' support.
linux Linux version of Vim.
lispindent Compiled with support for lisp indenting.
(always true)
listcmds Compiled with commands for the buffer list |:files|
and the argument list |arglist|.
localmap Compiled with local mappings and abbr. |:map-local|
lua Compiled with Lua interface |Lua|.
mac Any Macintosh version of Vim cf. osx
macunix Synonym for osxdarwin
menu Compiled with support for |:menu|.
mksession Compiled with support for |:mksession|.
modify_fname Compiled with file name modifiers. |filename-modifiers|
(always true)
mouse Compiled with support for mouse.
mouse_dec Compiled with support for Dec terminal mouse.
mouse_gpm Compiled with support for gpm (Linux console mouse)
mouse_gpm_enabled GPM mouse is working
mouse_netterm Compiled with support for netterm mouse.
mouse_pterm Compiled with support for qnx pterm mouse.
mouse_sysmouse Compiled with support for sysmouse (*BSD console mouse)
mouse_sgr Compiled with support for sgr mouse.
mouse_urxvt Compiled with support for urxvt mouse.
mouse_xterm Compiled with support for xterm mouse.
mouseshape Compiled with support for 'mouseshape'.
multi_byte Compiled with support for 'encoding' (always true)
multi_byte_encoding 'encoding' is set to a multibyte encoding.
multi_byte_ime Compiled with support for IME input method.
multi_lang Compiled with support for multiple languages.
mzscheme Compiled with MzScheme interface |mzscheme|.
nanotime Compiled with sub-second time stamp checks.
netbeans_enabled Compiled with support for |netbeans| and connected.
netbeans_intg Compiled with support for |netbeans|.
num64 Compiled with 64-bit |Number| support. (always true)
ole Compiled with OLE automation support for Win32.
osx Compiled for macOS cf. mac
osxdarwin Compiled for macOS, with |mac-darwin-feature|
packages Compiled with |packages| support.
path_extra Compiled with up/downwards search in 'path' and 'tags'
perl Compiled with Perl interface.
persistent_undo Compiled with support for persistent undo history.
postscript Compiled with PostScript file printing.
printer Compiled with |:hardcopy| support.
profile Compiled with |:profile| support.
python Python 2.x interface available. |has-python|
python_compiled Compiled with Python 2.x interface. |has-python|
python_dynamic Python 2.x interface is dynamically loaded. |has-python|
python3 Python 3.x interface available. |has-python|
python3_compiled Compiled with Python 3.x interface. |has-python|
python3_dynamic Python 3.x interface is dynamically loaded. |has-python|
pythonx Python 2.x and/or 3.x interface available. |python_x|
qnx QNX version of Vim.
quickfix Compiled with |quickfix| support.
reltime Compiled with |reltime()| support.
rightleft Compiled with 'rightleft' support.
ruby Compiled with Ruby interface |ruby|.
scrollbind Compiled with 'scrollbind' support. (always true)
showcmd Compiled with 'showcmd' support.
signs Compiled with |:sign| support.
smartindent Compiled with 'smartindent' support. (always true)
sodium Compiled with libsodium for better crypt support
sound Compiled with sound support, e.g. `sound_playevent()`
spell Compiled with spell checking support |spell|.
startuptime Compiled with |--startuptime| support.
statusline Compiled with support for 'statusline', 'rulerformat'
and special formats of 'titlestring' and 'iconstring'.
sun SunOS version of Vim.
sun_workshop Support for Sun |workshop| has been removed.
syntax Compiled with syntax highlighting support |syntax|.
syntax_items There are active syntax highlighting items for the
current buffer.
system Compiled to use system() instead of fork()/exec().
tag_binary Compiled with binary searching in tags files
|tag-binary-search|. (always true)
tag_old_static Support for old static tags was removed, see
|tag-old-static|.
tcl Compiled with Tcl interface.
termguicolors Compiled with true color in terminal support.
terminal Compiled with |terminal| support.
terminfo Compiled with terminfo instead of termcap.
termresponse Compiled with support for |t_RV| and |v:termresponse|.
textobjects Compiled with support for |text-objects|.
textprop Compiled with support for |text-properties|.
tgetent Compiled with tgetent support, able to use a termcap
or terminfo file.
timers Compiled with |timer_start()| support.
title Compiled with window title support |'title'|.
(always true)
toolbar Compiled with support for |gui-toolbar|.
ttyin input is a terminal (tty)
ttyout output is a terminal (tty)
unix Unix version of Vim. *+unix*
unnamedplus Compiled with support for "unnamedplus" in 'clipboard'
user_commands User-defined commands. (always true)
vartabs Compiled with variable tabstop support |'vartabstop'|.
vcon Win32: Virtual console support is working, can use
'termguicolors'. Also see |+vtp|.
vertsplit Compiled with vertically split windows |:vsplit|.
(always true)
vim_starting True while initial source'ing takes place. |startup|
*vim_starting*
vim9script Compiled with |Vim9| script support
viminfo Compiled with viminfo support.
vimscript-1 Compiled Vim script version 1 support
vimscript-2 Compiled Vim script version 2 support
vimscript-3 Compiled Vim script version 3 support
vimscript-4 Compiled Vim script version 4 support
virtualedit Compiled with 'virtualedit' option. (always true)
visual Compiled with Visual mode. (always true)
visualextra Compiled with extra Visual mode commands. (always
true) |blockwise-operators|.
vms VMS version of Vim.
vreplace Compiled with |gR| and |gr| commands. (always true)
vtp Compiled for vcon support |+vtp| (check vcon to find
out if it works in the current console).
wildignore Compiled with 'wildignore' option.
wildmenu Compiled with 'wildmenu' option.
win16 old version for MS-Windows 3.1 (always false)
win32 Win32 version of Vim (MS-Windows 95 and later, 32 or
64 bits)
win32unix Win32 version of Vim, using Unix files (Cygwin)
win64 Win64 version of Vim (MS-Windows 64 bit).
win95 Win32 version for MS-Windows 95/98/ME (always false)
winaltkeys Compiled with 'winaltkeys' option.
windows Compiled with support for more than one window.
(always true)
writebackup Compiled with 'writebackup' default on.
xfontset Compiled with X fontset support |xfontset|.
xim Compiled with X input method support |xim|.
xpm Compiled with pixmap support.
xpm_w32 Compiled with pixmap support for Win32. (Only for
backward compatibility. Use "xpm" instead.)
xsmp Compiled with X session management support.
xsmp_interact Compiled with interactive X session management support.
xterm_clipboard Compiled with support for xterm clipboard.
xterm_save Compiled with support for saving and restoring the
xterm screen.
x11 Compiled with X11 support.
==============================================================================
4. Matching a pattern in a String *string-match*
This is common between several functions. A regexp pattern as explained at
|pattern| is normally used to find a match in the buffer lines. When a
pattern is used to find a match in a String, almost everything works in the
same way. The difference is that a String is handled like it is one line.
When it contains a "\n" character, this is not seen as a line break for the
pattern. It can be matched with a "\n" in the pattern, or with ".". Example:
>
:let a = "aaaa\nxxxx"
:echo matchstr(a, "..\n..")
aa
xx
:echo matchstr(a, "a.x")
a
x
Don't forget that "^" will only match at the first character of the String and
"$" at the last character of the string. They don't match after or before a
"\n".
vim:tw=78:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl: